2014-07-07 Parsons B..

2014-07-07 Parsons B..

PARSONS BRINKERHOFF – HOUSTON

DOCUMENTS PROJECT MANUAL

ISSUED FOR BID

Date Prepared:

July 7, 2014

HOK Project #:

13.01051.00

submitted by:

HELLMUTH, OBATA & KASSABAUM, P.C.

211 North Broadway, Suite 700

St. Louis, Missouri 63102

Tel: 314.421.2000 Fax: 314-421.6073 www.hok.com

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000

012300

012500

012600

Summary

Alternates

Product Substitutions

Contract Modification Procedures

012613

013100

013216

013300

013313

014200

014516

015000

Procedures for Information Requests

Project Coordination

Schedules

Shop Drawings, Product Data And Samples

LEED Submittals

Definitions And Standards

Quality Assurance And Control

Temporary Facilities

016000

016710

017320

017323

017326

017329

017419

017700

Products

Environmental Impact Of Materials

Project Procedures For Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)

Sequence Of Finish Installation

Alteration Project Procedures

Cutting and Patching.

Waste Materials Management And Recycling

Project Closeout Requirements

017836

018113

Warranties

Sustainable Design Requirements

DIVISION 02 - EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 Selective Demolition

DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE

033000 Cast-In-Place Concrete

033303 Stained Concrete

DIVISION 04 - MASONRY

NOT USED

DIVISION 05 - METALS

055000

057000

Metal Fabrications

Decorative Metals

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061000

064023

064200

064205

Carpentry, General

Casework And Millwork

Wood Paneling

Wood Fins

TABLE OF CONTENTS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

TOC-1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

072100

078413

079200

Thermal Insulation

Fire Stopping

Joint Sealant

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS

081216

081416

084126

Interior Aluminum Frames

Flush Wood Doors

Flush Tempered Glass Doors

Glazing 088000

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

092900

093000

095113

095443

096513

096523

096800

097200

097713

099100

Gypsum Board Systems

Tile Work

Acoustical Ceilings

Stretched Fabric Ceilings

Resilient Base And Accessories

Resilient Tile Flooring

Carpeting

Wall Covering

Stretched Fabric System

Painting and Finishing

DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES

102238

102239

102600

104413

Operable Panel Partitions

Operable Glass Walls

Wall Protection

Fire Extinguishers And Cabinets

DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT

113100 Appliances And Miscellaneous Equipment

DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

122113

122413

123600

123640

127800

Horizontal Blinds

Window Shades

Solid Surface Material

Stone Tops

Banquette Seating

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

NOT USED

DIVISION 23 – HVAC

NOT USED

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

265100.01 Lighting Fixture Schedule

END OF TOC

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

TABLE OF CONTENTS TOC-3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

RELATED DOCUMENTS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

DIVISION 1

Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to work of this Division.

DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 Summary

012300 Alternates

012600 Contract Modification Procedures

012613 Procedures for Information Requests

013216 Schedules

013300 Shop Drawings, Product Data And Samples

014200 Definitions And Standards

014516 Quality Assurance And Control

015000 Temporary Facilities

016000 Products

016710 Environmental Impact Of Materials

017320 Project Procedures For Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)

017323 Sequence Of Finish Installation

017326 Alteration Project Procedures

017329 Cutting and Patching.

017419 Waste Materials Management And Recycling

017700 Project Closeout Requirements

017836 Warranties

018113 Sustainable Design Rquirements

SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

A. The Project is identified as Parsons Brinckerhoff, Houston.

B. The Work includes all selective demolition, general construction, mechanical, plumbing, fire protection and electrical work necessary to complete the construction for tenant fit-out as indicated on the drawings and specified.

A.

A. Use of Site: Schedule work to minimize disruption and inconvenience to Owner and Building

Landlord use of during normal activities. Coordinate outages with Building Landlord’s

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

notification procedures. Limit use of premises to work in areas indicated. Do not disturb portions of site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

1. It shall be recognized that while work is confined to a certain floor or areas of building, work for various systems may have to be extended to include other areas in order that systems may be installed. Plan work in advance and obtain permission from Owner and

Building Landlord for work to be performed in other areas so that affected areas may be vacated or otherwise prepared by Owner or Building Landlord. Interruption of access and power to areas where the Owner wishes to use the facility during construction shall be kept to minimum

B. Construction Limits: Limit Work to within areas of the work. Notify Owner and Building

Landlord if Work activities require work outside Construction Limits.

C. Normal Working Hours:

1. Normal work hours shall as defined by the Tenant Lease Agreement. Certain portions of the work, as indicted on the drawing, will be required to be performed after normal working hours. All work required after normal working hours shall comply with the requirements set forth in the Building Landlord.

E. Construction Personnel Conduct

1. Construction personnel shall maintain a level of conduct consistent with environment in which they are working.

2. Tobacco Products will not be permitted within the building at any time and only at

Owner's designated area.

F. Noise: Do not use concrete saws, jack hammers, shotblasters and similar noise producing construction equipment in or adjacent to Landlord’s Tenant areas during the normal working hours unless specifically approved by the Building Landlord. There will be no use of audio equipment such as radios, tape players, or compact disc players on the Project Site by construction personnel.

G. Odors or Fumes: Do not use products, materials, or equipment which produces odors or fumes objectionable to Landlord, in Tenant occupied areas, during normal working hours, unless specifically approved by Building Landlord.

H. Use of Landlord’s Facilities: Use of Landlord facilities and amenities in the procedures outlined in the Owner’s Tenant Agreement with the Landlord.

A. New Products: Do not incorporate materials formulated with asbestos in any of the work of this contract. Provide and post MSDS sheets for potentially hazardous materials and equipment in location designated by Owner.

1.6 PREPARATION

A. Make suitable preparations for the installation of all work including piping, conduit, hangers, inserts, anchors, grounds and supports that will pass through, be embedded in, or attached to concrete, masonry walls, floors, partitions or structural members.

B. Provide proper sleeves, boxes, receptacles or chases for openings or recesses to receive work occurring in or passing through such members. Accurately locate and secure sleeves,

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

boxes, and receptacles or chases before masonry, gypsum board partitions and ceilings are erected..

SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement.

2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the

Contract Sum to incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.2 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C.

D.

Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification

Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

1.3 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: Quote separate amounted to be added to or deducted from the base bid for furnishing and installing stained concrete (SC-01) in lieu of ceramic tile (CT-01) at all locations as indicated and specified.

B. Alternate No. 2: Quote separate amounted to be added to or deducted from the base bid for furnishing and installing horizontal blinds in lieu of roller shade blinds at all exterior

windows as indicated and specified.

SECTION 012500 - PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: The following are considered substitutions, and require compliance with the requirements of this Section:

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

c. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders issued by governing authorities.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Request Submittal: The Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 7 days prior to receipt of bids, or 20 days after commencement of the Work.

Requests received more than 10 days prior to receipt of bids will not be considered. Requests received more than 20 days after commencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Architect.

2. Items Proposed as "equal" to products listed by manufacturer/product are

"substitutions".

3. The following are not considered substitutions: a. Revisions to the Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. b. Specified options of products and construction methods included in the Contract

Documents.

1. Submit 2 copies of each request for substitution for consideration. Submit requests with completed Substitution Request Form, shown at end of this Section.

2. Identify the product or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:

1. Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Bidder during the bidding period, and requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions."

1) Include full product data for materials or items specified to facilitate evaluation of proposal.

2) For proposed substitution, include Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installation procedures. b. List of comparable installations or usage in the Project area. c. Samples, where applicable or requested. d. A detailed itemized comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements, such as performance, weight, size, durability, and visual effect. e. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. f. Product Data, including Drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

g. A statement indicating the substitution's effect on the Contractor's Construction

Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. h. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract

Sum. i. Submit notarized certification by the Contractor and manufacturer that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately. j. Manufacturer must certify applicability

B. Architect will take action within 1 week of receipt of request for substitution. Architect's decision on accepting/rejecting substitution is final.

C. Conditions: The Architect will receive and consider the Contractor's request for substitution when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect. If the following conditions are not satisfied, the Architect will return the requests without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.

1. Extensive revisions to the Contract Documents are not required.

2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of the Contract Documents.

3. The request is timely, fully documented, and properly submitted.

4. The request is not part of related "submittals" required under Section 01300.

5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract

Time. The Architect will not consider the request if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

6. The request is directly related to an "or equal" clause or similar language in the Contract

Documents.

7. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

8. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

9. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.

10. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provides the required warranty.

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-5

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A. Minor Changes in the Work: Architect’s Supplemental Instructions (ASI) authorizing minor changes in the Work will be issued which do not involve adjustment to the Contract Sum or

Contract Time.

B. Change Order Proposal Requests: Will be issued by the design team in the form of a Request for Proposal, for Change Order Proposal Requests.

1. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: A detailed description of proposed changes in the

Work that will require adjustment to the Contract Sum or Contract Time. The description may include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications issued as a Bulletin in form of a Request for Proposal.

2. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: When latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, the Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change in form of AIA Document G709.

C. Construction Change Directive: A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. The Architect may issue a Construction

Change Directive instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

D. Submit claims for increased costs because of a change in scope or nature of the allowance described in the Contract Documents within [21, confirm with General Conditions and

Agreement between Owner and Contractor] days of receipt of the Change Order or

Construction Change Directive authorizing work to proceed.

E. On Owner's approval of a Request for Proposal, a Change Order will be issued for signatures of Owner and Contractor.

SECTION 012613 – PROCEDURES FOR INFORMATION REQUESTS

F. Submit all requests for clarification or additional information as a Request for Information (RFI) in writing to the Architect, with copy to the Owner, indicating the project name, address, contractor information, subject, description of the request and RFI number.

1. Limit each RFI to one subject.

2. Submit an RFI if one of the following conditions occur: a. Contractor discovers and unforeseen condition or circumstance that is not described in the Contract Documents. b. Contractor discovers an apparent conflict or discrepancy between portions of the

Contract Documents that appears to be inconsistent or is not reasonably inferred from the intent of the Contract Documents.

3. Contractor shall not: a. Submit an RFI as a request for substitution. b. Submit an RFI as a submittal.

G. Architect’s Information Request (AIR): The Architect’s Information Requests are documents issued by the Design Team to request specific information or response from the Contractor.

The Contractor will review each AIR, determine action required and return a response for the

Architect’s information.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-6

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT COORDINATION

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

1.2 INSPECTION

A. Installer Inspections: Require Installer of each major unit of work to inspect substrate conditions for installation, and to report unsatisfactory conditions. Correct unsatisfactory conditions before proceeding.

A. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.

B. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation.

Reject damaged and defective items.

C. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work.

Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement.

D. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposed Work to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Architect for final decision.

E. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation. Field verify dimensional information prior to fabrication of materials.

F. Install each component of the Project that will ensure the best possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as necessary to prevent deterioration.

1.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Clean each element of work at time of installation. Provide sufficient maintenance and protection during construction to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion.

B. Contractor shall be responsible for removal of litter of debris deposited in or near the

Construction site, from operations of the Contractor or his Subcontractors or by their employees. Contractor shall remove such litter or debris at no cost to the Owner.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-7

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

SECTION 013216 – SCHEDULES

1.1 SCHEDULE

A. In collaboration with the various Contractors associated with the Work, the General Contractor will compile all Contractor schedules and develop a project master construction schedule, which integrates activities of Architect, Contractors, Subcontractors, Suppliers, and

Commissioning Authority and meets the time requirements

1. Proceed with preparation of the schedule immediately following notification of Contract award.

2. Follow the steps necessary to complete development of the schedule in sufficient time so that the schedule can be submitted and accepted for use no later than 20 days after commencement of the Work.

3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating the schedule and for reporting progress; coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.

Use "one working day" as the unit of time.

SECTION 013300 – SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

General:

1. Submittal procedures include those for submitting electronic copies of all submittals

(except samples), in portable document file (.pdf) format.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Coordination Drawings show the dimensions, relationship and integration of different construction elements that require careful coordination during fabrication or installation to fit in the space provided or to function as intended.

1. Preparation of Coordination Drawings is specified in Division 1 Section "Coordination" and may include components previously shown in detail on Shop Drawings or Product

Data.

B. Certified test (or inspection) reports are documents attesting that a product meets a specified level of performance or quality when a specimen is tested or inspected in accordance with a specified procedure, and consist of a certified statement by the product supplier or Contractor accompanied by a complete report of the inspection or test. These types of reports do not require Architect's approval.

C. Miscellaneous submittals related directly to the work (non-administrative) include warranties, maintenance agreements, workmanship bonds, project photographs, survey data and reports, physical work records, copies of industry standards, record drawings, quality testing and certifying reports, field measurement data, operating and maintenance materials, overrun stock, and similar information, devices and materials applicable to the work and not processed as shop drawings, product data samples, certificates of conformance or compliance, or certified test reports, and similar information, devices and materials applicable shall be submitted solely for informational purposes. Providing these types of submittals are sufficient and adequate they will not be responded to.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-8

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, required visual and performance mock-ups, delivery, other submittals and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

3. Incomplete Submittals and Excessive Errors: Shop drawings, product data, samples, and administrative submittals that contain excessive errors or that are incomplete will be returned unchecked and any delay caused thereby will be the responsibility of the

Contractor.

4. Arrange for preparation of required submittals in sufficient detail to permit analysis and review by Contractor and Architect, sufficiently early to allow for review, and accommodate the rate of construction progress required under the Contract. Delete or mark out extraneous material not relevant to the Project.

5. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the

Contract Documents on submittals.

6. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay.

7. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. Package submittals to cover complete assemblies or systems.

8. Contractor’s Review Stamp: Contractor shall certify by stamped, signed, and dated

B. Processing: To avoid the need to delay installation as a result of the time required to process submittals, allow sufficient time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals. notation on each submittal, "I affirmatively state that there are no material deviations from the requirements of the Contract Documents." Architect will take no action on

Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples that have not first been certified, by stamped signed notation, making such affirmation.

1 Allow a minimum of ten (10) working days for initial review. a. Allow additional time if processing must be delayed to permit coordination with subsequent submittals. b. The Architect will promptly advise the Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Shop Drawings: Ten (10) consecutive working days will be required for the review of any shop drawings and other submittals requiring review by the Architect if received in quantity equal to or less than fifty (50) sheets during five (5) consecutive working days.

For each sheet or other item in excess of over fifty (50) sheets received in five (5)

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-9

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

consecutive working days, additional time will be required for review time. The Architect will advise the Contractor of additional time required.

3. Resubmittals: Allow ten (10) consecutive working days for reprocessing each submittal.

4. No extension of Contract Time will be authorized because of: a. Failure to comply with approved Submittal Schedule. b. Failure to transmit submittals to the Architect sufficiently in advance of the Work to permit processing.

C. The Architect will review the submittals on shop drawings, product data and samples and one

(1) resubmittal.

1. For submittals in excess of the one (1) resubmittal, the Contractor shall reimburse the

Owner, for additional services required of the Architect, the Architect's consultant by these additional resubmittals.

2. No additional time will be allowed the Contractor for delays caused by excess number of resubmittals.

D. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:

1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation to each item.

2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

4. Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Architect.

1. Submittals shall be neat and legible, of uniform scale, responsive to requirements, with all sheets of similar information of same size.

2. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification. Indicate the name of the entity that prepared each submittal on the label or title block. a. Provide 2 spaces approximately 4 by 5 inches (100 by 125 mm) on the label or beside the title block on Shop Drawings to record the Architect's and Contractor's review stamp and approval markings and the action taken.

3. Include the following information on the label for processing and recording action taken.

Project name.

Date.

Name and address of the Architect.

Name and address of the Contractor.

Name and address of the subcontractor.

Name and address of the supplier.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-10

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Name of the manufacturer.

Number and title of appropriate

Specification Section.

Contractor's submittal number.

Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. a. Submittal item conforms with approved Submittal Schedule. b. Submittal package is complete. c. Submittal does not include Substitution Request. d. Deviations from the Documents or revisions from previous submissions are clearly indicated.

F. Submittal Transmittal: Package each submittal appropriately for transmittal and handling.

Transmit each submittal from the Contractor to the Architect using Project Transmittal Form.

Submittals received from sources other than the Contractor will be returned without action.

1. Information on Submittal Sheets: a. Record relevant information and requests for data. b. Record deviations from Contract Document requirements, including minor variations and limitations.

2. Include Contractor's certification that information complies with Contract Document requirements.

3. Transmittal Form: Prepare a draft of transmittal of transmittal form for project, and submit to the Architect for acceptance. Include the following: a. List submittal number on each submittal as part of Contractor's review stamp and on transmittal. b. Send submittals separately based on Specification Division and Section numbers, with transmittal form for each submittal. c. Do not include more than a single Specification section on a submittal transmittal form. Each specification section is required to have its own transmittal from the

Contractor. d. Identify each proper Section number followed by sequential submittal number.

G. Establish and maintain a Submittal Log. Place submittal number on each shop drawing as part of Contractor's stamp and at top of Submittal Form. Submittal number shall consist of applicable Specification Section number followed by the sequential Submittal number, for example:

1. Example: 055000-1, 055000-2, 055000-3, etc. suffix, for example:

1. 055000 – 02-0 for original submittal.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-11

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

2. 055000 - 02-1 for first resubmittal.

3. 055000 – 2-2 for second resubmittal.

I. Resubmittals: After the Architect's review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required.

Identify changes made since previous submittal by clouding changes.

A. Prepare a complete schedule of submittals. Unless otherwise required in the Summary of

Work submit the schedule within 10 days of the date required for submittal of the Contractor's

Construction Schedule.

1. Coordinate the Submittal Schedule with the list of subcontracts, Schedule of Values and the list of products as well as the Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Coordinate the submittal schedule with the Contractor's construction schedule. Submit the submittal schedule with the Products List Schedule specified elesewhere in Division

1.

3. Prepare the schedule in chronological order. Provide the following information: a. Scheduled date for the first submittal. b. Related Section number. c. Submittal category (Shop Drawings, Product Data, or Samples). d. Name of the subcontractor. e. Description of the part of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for resubmittal. g. Scheduled date for the Architect's final release or approval is needed.

4. Submittals submitted out of sequence with Submittal Schedule requires additional review time; the Architect will inform the Contractor when this will occur.

5. Review of sample submittals will requires that all samples of adjacent materials will also have been submitted and received.

B. Architects Action: The Architect will advise the Contractor when additional time will be required to review a submittal and which sample submittals will be required to be submitted simultaneously for proper review and approval.

C. Distribution: Following responses to the submittal, print and distribute copies to the Architect,

Owner, subcontractors, and other parties required to comply with submittal dates indicated.

Post copies in the Project meeting room and field office.

1. When revisions are made, distribute to the same parties and post in the same locations.

Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the

Work and are no longer involved in construction activities.

D. Schedule Updating: Revise the schedule after each meeting or activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue the updated schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

E. Do not schedule submittals out of sequence with the schedule for work except as required for products requiring long lead times between order and delivery. Submittals for long-lead-time items shall be accompanied by verification of the required lead time from the supplier.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-12

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

F. Do not permit copies of submittals without an appropriate final "Action" marking by the

Architect/Engineer to be used in connection with the work.

A. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification

Sections.

1. Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Project Web site or FTP site specifically established for Project.

2. Submit electronic transmittals or notification of posting via email.

3. Submit one electronic copy of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return one electronic copy.

4. Prepare all submittals in accordance with approved Submittal Schedule.

5. No submittal shall include a Substitution Request.

A. Submit newly prepared information drawn to accurate scale. Highlight, encircle, or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or copy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to the Project is not a Shop Drawing.

1. Deviations from Contract Documents require specific written acceptance by the

Architect of the noted deviation and clear indication on the submittal.

B. Information required on shop drawings includes, dimensions, identification of specific products and materials which are included in the work. Provide special notation of dimensions that have been established by field measurement.

C. Submittal: Provide one correctable translucent reproducible print and two blue-line or blackline prints for all sheets larger than 11" x 17". The reproducible print shall be returned.

A. General information required specifically as product data includes manufacturer's standard printed recommendations for application and use, and special coordination requirements for interfacing the material, product or system with other work.

B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system.

Product Data includes printed information, such as manufacturer's installation instructions, catalog cuts, standard color charts, roughing-in diagrams and templates, standard wiring diagrams, and performance curves. Where Product Data must be specially prepared because standard printed data is not suitable for use, submit as "Shop Drawings."

1. Modify Product Data sheets to delete information which is not applicable to the Work.

Edit all material to conform to job requirements, and to clearly show model number, type or size proposed. Provide additional information if necessary to supplement standard information. Product data sheets that are submitted with extraneous information not deleted and/or modified will be returned to the Contractor without review.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-13

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1.8 SAMPLES:

A. Submit Three (3) sets of samples for the Architect/Engineer's visual review of general generic kind, color, pattern, and texture, and for a final check of the coordination of these characteristics with other related elements of the work.

B. Submittals shall be reviewed and one set shall be returned with the Architect/Engineer's

"Action" marking.

A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect.

B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file and three paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional.

1. Where design calculations are requested, submit copies of calculations sealed and signed by the design professional responsible for their preparation concurrently with related system shop drawings.

2. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the

Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

A. Warranties: Refer to other sections for requirements on warranties, product bonds, workmanship bonds and maintenance agreements. In addition to copies desired for the

Contractor's use, furnish 3 sample copies of such warranties, bonds or agreements. Provide

3 executed copies where required for project closeout.

B. Closeout Submittals: Refer to section "Project Closeout" and to individual sections of these specifications for specific submittal requirements of project closeout information, materials, tools, and similar items.

C. Miscellaneous submittals (as defined under paragraph "DEFINITIONS" herein) will not be processed as shop drawings, product data or samples. These types of miscellaneous submittals are submitted solely for informational purposes. Provided they are sufficient and adequate, they will not be responded to.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE SUBMITTALS

A. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data, certifications, manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports, and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications.

B. Certifications: Where other Sections of the Specifications require certification that a product, material, or installation complies with specified requirements, submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer certifying compliance with specified requirements.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-14

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. Certifications shall be dated, identified to the project, work category listed and carry

Contractor's signature.

2. Signature: Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company.

C. When professional certification of performance characteristics of materials, systems, or equipment is required by the Contract Documents, the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon such certification to establish that the materials, systems or equipment will meet the performance criteria required by the Contract Documents.

D. Inspection and Test Reports: Requirements for submittal of inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies are specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Control."

A. General: Architect/Engineer shall review each submittal, mark with appropriate "Action", and return specified copies. Where the submittal must be held for coordination, the

Architect/Engineer shall so advise the Contractor.

1. NO EXCEPTIONS: Submittal has been reviewed for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and design concept of the Contract Documents and no exceptions are taken; Contractor may proceed with work represented in submittal.

Architect’s review is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy or completeness of other details, such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment and systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor.

2. EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED: Submittal has been reviewed as stated in Subparagraph 1. above, but certain exceptions are noted. Contractor may proceed with work represented in submittal, provided Contractor agrees to incorporate exceptions noted by

Architect. Resubmittal is not required.

3. REVISE/ RESUBMIT: Submittal has been reviewed as stated in Subparagraph 1. above, but certain exceptions are noted, that as a minimum, are necessary for conformance with the design intent of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not proceed with work represented in submittal. Revise submittal incorporating noted exceptions and resubmit to Architect until “NO EXCEPTIONS” or “EXCEPTIONS AS

NOTED" status is given.

4. REJECTED: Submittal has been reviewed as stated in Subparagraph 1. above and is not acceptable. Contractor shall not proceed with work represented for one or more of the following reasons: a. Work represented in submittal does not fulfill the requirements of the Contract

Documents; submit specified item. b. Submittal has not been made in accordance with procedures specified. c. Insufficient and incomplete information is provided; accurate determination is not possible. d, Submittal contains errors or omissions; accurate determination is not possible. e, Information provided does not conform to information included in the Contract

Documents. f. Submittal contains extraneous materials; accurate determination is not possible.

B. Informational Submittals: Architect is not required to review informational submittals.

Informational submittals will be returned if contradictions are discovered.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-15

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. COMMENTS AS NOTED: Submittal has been processed without action for the following reason:

A. Submittal is for information only and does not require Architect’s review.

2. NO ACTION TAKEN : Submittal has not been reviewed for one or more of the following reasons: a. Submittal is not required by the Contract Documents. b. Submittal includes manufacturer’s instructions to the Contractor relative to

Contractor’s responsibility for means, methods, procedures, and safety precautions.

C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect.

SECTION 013313 - LEED SUBMITTALS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. As a LEED project, specific information will be required of ALL material installed on the project. This Section includes specific submittal, general, and procedural requirements specifically required to meet the Project goals.

1.4 DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS

A. USGBC: US Green Building Council.

B. LEED: Leadership in Energy & Environmental Design. A series of standards developed by the

USGBC. Each rating system is an adjustment based on the project type and use. The standards provide a means for quantifiable third party verification of sustainable construction processes.

C. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from the Project location (longitude and latitude). Manufacturing location is required for all materials. Distribution location is not considered to be a manufacturing location.

D. Regionally Extracted, Harvested, or Recovered Materials: Raw material source, prior to manufacture. Raw materials that qualify as regional are extracted, harvested, or recovered within a radius of 500 miles from the Project site. For raw material that is recycled, use location of recycling or recovery center.

E. Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of base materials that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (preconsumer or postindustrial), or after consumer use (post-consumer).

F. FSC Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturer, distributor, and all entities prior to installer, certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an

FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2, "Principles and Criteria."

Certificates shall include evidence that mill, manufacturer, and distributor is certified for chainof-custody by an FSC-accredited certification body. Certificate is a number assigned by FSC to manufacturers, distributors who have complied.

G. VOC Content: Volatile Organic Compound Content, calculated in grams per liter (g/L) according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24). 1 lb/G = 119.8 g/L.

H. MSDS: Material Safety and Data Sheet for product.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-16

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: LEED submittals are a required part of this project. Product Manufacturer’s cut sheet and submittal data shall provide additional proof and documentation of information completed on the Required Submittal Information for LEED ID & C Projects form attached at the end of this section. Electronic copies of this form may be available to contractors at discretion of Project Owner.

B. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost for building materials used for Project. Include statement indicating total cost of mechanical and electrical components. Do not include amounts for installation, labor, overhead, profit – only basic material cost. Statement for groups of items (doors, paints, hardware) may be a vendor list. If an item is grouped, please submit all of this group at a single time.

D. LEED Documentation Submittals: Provide the following information for all materials used in

Project construction. Information may be substantiated by cut-sheet, manufacturer data,

MSDS, technical data sheets, and other included submittal information.

1. Address and phone number of location of product or material manufacture – not necessarily manufacturer’s home office, and not distributor’s address.

2. Statement form manufacturer with address or city of raw material sources (prior to manufacture). For material that is recycled, use location of recycling center.

3. Recycled content percentage of each manufactured product – percentage shall be by weight, post-consumer and pre-consumer (post-industrial) information separated.

4. Paints, coatings, sealants, caulking, glues, adhesives, cements, carpet adhesive – any material which requires curing or drying on site – provide MSDS and VOC content in g/L. Maximum quantities for these materials are indicated in paragraph 2.1 below and in the MATERIALS GENERAL sections.

5. Product Specific submittals: The following submittals are specific to an individual material or system used on the Project and shall be in addition to the submittal items noted above and as required in the individual product specification section. a. Product Data for roofing materials indicating Energy Star compliance and/or SRI

(Solar Reflectance Index). b. Product Data and FSC certificates of chain-of-custody for products containing wood. This shall include, but is not limited to, wood blocking, wood decking, rough carpentry, miscellaneous carpentry, cabinetry, doors, plywood, particle board, and composite wood. Temporary wood formwork for concrete which does not remain on the project is not included in this requirement. c. Products Data for cabinetry, doors, plywood, particle board, and composite wood:

Provide data sheet indicating no added urea-formaldehyde used in products’ manufacture – resins, binders, glues, and laminate adhesives. Provide manufacturer information stating no urea-formaldehyde resins or glues utilized in product manufacture. d. Product Data for Carpet and Carpet Pads: Provide CRI (Carpet and Rug Institute)

Green Label Plus number for carpet and Green Label number for pad. e. Product Data for plumbing fixtures indicating water consumption.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-17

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

f. Product Data for HVAC equipment indicating absence of CFC refrigerants and the current refrigerant type. g. Product Data and wiring diagrams for sensors and data collection system used to provide continuous metering of building energy and water consumption performance over time. h. Product Data and Shop Drawings for carbon dioxide monitoring system. i. Product Data and Shop Drawings for sensors and control system used to provide individual airflow and temperature controls. j. Product Data for lighting control sensors including occupancy sensors and daylight sensors.

2.1 LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS

A. Refer to section 016710 – Environmental Impact Of Materials for guidelines of VOC content which cannot be exceeded for any and all of these materials on this project. If you have any question as to what guideline to follow for a particular material, please contact the LEED

Project Administrator for guidance and assistance.

B. Do not use composite wood and agrifiber products that contain added urea-formaldehyde in the resin or binders. Do not use adhesives and laminating adhesives with urea-formaldehyde.

C. Do not use aerosol wall marking paints on project. No commercially, locally available products meet the VOC requirements of the project.

SECTION 014200 –DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. Approved: The term approved, when used in conjunction with the Architect's action on the

Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, is limited to the Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Assigning Specialists: Certain Sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by specialists who are recognized experts in those operations.

The specialists must be engaged for those activities, and their assignments are requirements over which the Contractor has no choice or option. However, the ultimate responsibility for fulfilling Contract requirements remains with the Contractor.

1. This requirement shall not be interpreted to conflict with enforcing building codes and similar regulations governing the Work. It is also not intended to interfere with local trade union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions.

C. Day: A day is a calendar day beginning and ending at 12:00 midnight.

D. Directed: Terms such as directed, requested, authorized, selected, approved, required, and permitted mean directed by the Architect, requested by the Architect, and similar phrases.

E. Furnish: The term furnish means pay for, supply and deliver to the Project Site, unload, inspect, unpacking, assembly and store as specified or directed while retaining care, custody and control.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-18

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

F Herein: As used in the Contract Documents refers to the contents of a particular Section, or the contents within parts of the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplemental

Conditions), and Division 1 - General Requirements.

G. Indicated: The term indicated refers to graphic representations, notes, or schedules on the

Drawings, Paragraphs or Schedules in the Specifications, and similar requirements in the

Contract Documents. Terms such as shown, noted, scheduled, and specified are used to help the reader locate the reference. There is no limitation on location.

H. Unpacking, assembly, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and adjust and test for satisfactory performance and operation.

I. Installer: An installer is the Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor, either as an employee, subcontractor, or contractor of lower tier, to perform a particular construction activity, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations. Installers are required to be experienced in the operations they are engaged to perform.

J. Not-In-Contract: Not-in-contract (NIC) indicates work not included in this contract, but which may require provisions in the construction for future installation by Others..

K. Product: Materials, systems, and equipment incorporated in or to be incorporated in the

Project.

L. Project: Is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by Owner or by separate contractors.

M. Provide: The term provide means to furnish and install, including without limitation, labor, materials, equipment, transportation, services, and other items required to complete referenced tasks and ready for the intended use.

N. Regulations: The term regulations includes laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, as well as rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

O. Testing Agencies: A testing agency is an independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests, either at the Project site or elsewhere, and to report on and, if required, to interpret results of those inspections or tests.

P. Trades: Using terms such as carpentry is not intended to imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as carpenter. It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespersons of the corresponding generic name.

1.2 STANDARDS AND REGULATIONS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with 2 or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-19

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

A. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Engineer for a decision before proceeding.

SECTION 014516 – QUALITY ASSURANCE AND CONTROL

A. Contractor shall arrange and pay for tests and inspections:

1. Tests and inspections required under International Building Code 2009 New Jersey

Edition, and other applicable Codes, plus other tests and inspections required by the

Contract Documents.

2. Tests and inspections of materials, products, or equipment to certify compliance with

Contract Documents, before incorporation into the Work.

3. Testing and Certification as required by division 16 specifications.

4. Additional tests, samples, inspections, or engineering services Contractor determines appropriate for performance of Work or for Contractor's convenience.

5. Tests, inspections, or laboratory services necessary with respect to substitutions.

6 Additional tests and inspections when initial tests or inspections indicate Work does not comply with Contract Documents.

7. Tests and inspections required or conducted by public authorities as part of permits or inspection fees.

B. Owner will deduct charges for retesting and re-inspection fees if Owner has received and paid for such Work from Contractor's Application for Payment.

C. Cooperate with testing laboratory personnel. Provide access to Work and manufacturer's facilities.

D. Secure and deliver to testing laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and requiring testing.

E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work being tested; to obtain and handle samples at the Project Site or at the source of the product being tested; for storage and curing of test samples.

F. Notify testing laboratory sufficiently in advance to allow laboratory to assign personnel and schedule testing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Quality Control Submittals

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-20

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. Test results and reports for tests, inspections, and laboratory services required by

Contract Documents.

1.3 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY CONTROL PROGRAM

A. Develop and maintain Contractor's Quality Control Program to perform inspections and testing of items of Work, including those of subcontractors to ensure conformance to Contract

Documents.

B. Within 30 days of Notice of Award submit quality control plan and list of proposed personnel for Engineer's and Owner’s information.

C. Provide appropriate facilities, instruments, and testing devices required for performance of

Contractor's quality control.

D. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality.

E. Ensure quality control procedures apply to manufactured and shop fabricated items.

F. Inspection procedures for Contractor's Quality Control Program.

1. Ensure materials, products and equipment conform to requirements of Contract

Documents and submittals have been reviewed by Architect as required by Contract

Documents.

2. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

4. Confirm prior Work has been performed to comply with requirements of Contract

Documents.

5. Perform inspections on routine basis to ensure continuing compliance with Contract requirements.

G. Reports

1. Submit reports from each inspector and technician noting observation and recommendations made.

2. Indicate non-conforming items with explanation of cause, proposed remedial action, and corrective action taken.

A. Cooperate with parties requiring tests. Provide qualified personnel after due notice; perform to comply with schedule and promptly submit report of each test and inspection to Engineer.

B. Perform specified inspections, sampling, and testing.

C. For tests and inspections performed at Project Site, promptly notify parties performing Work,

Engineer, and Owner, of observed irregularities or deficiencies of Work or materials to prevent proceeding with Work which may subsequently be determined to be defective.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-21

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A. Cooperate with testing laboratory personnel. Provide access to Work and manufacturer's facilities.

B. Secure and deliver to testing laboratory adequate quantities of representational samples of materials proposed to be used and requiring testing.

C. Provide testing laboratory with preliminary design mix proposed for concrete, and other material mixes requiring control by testing laboratory.

1. Furnish incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work being tested; to obtain and handle samples at the Project Site or at the source of the product being tested; for storage and curing of test samples.

D. Notify testing laboratory sufficiently in advance to allow laboratory to assign personnel and schedule testing.

1.6 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample-taking, and similar services; repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes to eliminate deficiencies, including deficiencies in visual qualities of exposed finishes.

B. Protect work exposed by or for quality control service activities.

1. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES

1.1 GENERAL DEFINITIONS

A. This section specifies certain minimum temporary facilities to be provided regardless of methods and means selected for performance of the work, but not by way of limitation and not assured for compliance with governing regulations. Use of alternate temporary facilities is

Trade Contractor's option, subject to Architect's and Owner's acceptance. Temporary facilities is defined to exclude tools and construction machines, testing, demolition, alterations, and similar items.

1.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES

A. Water: Owner will furnish water necessary for construction operations. Trade Contractor shall make connection to existing water supply only at location approved by the Owner.

B. Electricity: Owner will make available, electrical service within the limit of the existing building system, in order to perform work in areas within the existing building. The Trade Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional electrical service for any equipment he employs, that exceeds the limit of the existing electrical service. Trade Contractor shall be responsible to see that the existing electrical service is not overloaded.

C. Toilets: Use of the Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, so long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to the Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to the condition prevalent at the time of initial use.

D. Telephone: Trade Contractor shall use existing pay phones for business connected with work and in emergencies.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-22

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

E. Temporary Lighting: Provide temporary lighting sufficient for demands of construction activity.

1.3 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES

A. General: Provide whatever facilities and services may be needed to properly support primary construction process and meet governing regulations.

B. Deliveries: Sub-Contractors and material suppliers shall coordinate all deliveries with the

Trade Contractor's Superintendent. Move deliveries immediately to within contract limits.

Provide flagman for all deliveries interrupting traffic.

C. Storage Area: Provide secure, remote storage for materials and equipment.

D. Collection and Disposal of Waste: Collect waste from construction areas and elsewhere daily.

Comply with requirements of NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste material and debris.

Enforce requirements strictly. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days when the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). Handle hazardous, dangerous, or unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste by containerizing properly. Dispose of material lawfully.

E. Temporary Protection: Provide temporary protection as necessary to protect installed finishes, and existing finishes, equipment and store fixtures from construction activity.

F. Dustproof Partitions: Construct dustproof partitions from concrete floor to underside of structure above or underside of finished ceilings. Erect steel stud framing spaced 16 inches on center, with floor and top plates or runners. Install 1/4 inch thick plywood or 1/2 inch thick gypsum board on Owner occupied side of framing. Cover joints between sheets and at floors, walls, and ceilings with 1-1/2 inch wide masking tape.

G. Safety Signage: Provide construction warning and safety signs at construction entries as required by applicable governing authorities.

H. Temporary Hoists: Provide facilities for hoisting materials. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

The selection of type, size, and number of hoisting facilities for temporary use at project site is

Contractor's option.

I. Temporary Elevator Use: The Contractor shall use elevator as designated by the Building

Owner for hauling of materials and debris. The Contractor must relinquish scheduled services for elevator use upon demand of Landlord and reschedule with approval of Landlord. All materials being transported to the work areas as well as the debris being hauled off that floor shall be promptly removed from the car, and elevator put back into normal usage, unless otherwise approved by the Landlord. The Contractor shall, at all times, keep the elevator neat and free from dirt, dust and rubbish caused by the work under this Contract.

1.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION

A. General: Provide facilities and services as necessary to effectively protect property from losses and persons from injury during the course of construction.

B. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire protection facilities of the types needed to protect against fire losses. Comply with NFPA 10 "Standard for Portable Fire

Extinguishers", and NFPA 241 "Standard for Safeguarding Construction, Alterations and

Demolition Operations".

1. Locate fire extinguishes where convenient and effective for their intended purpose.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-23

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

C. Keep combustible material, including crated equipment to a minimum. Remove crating and packing material from project site immediately after unpacking items.

D. Keep project area clean and orderly.

E. Termination and Removal: Remove all temporary facilities from site when the need for it has ended. Any building systems used for temporary facilities shall be thoroughly cleaned.

SECTION 016000 – PRODUCTS

A. General Limitations: Where possible, provide entire required quantity of each generic product, material or equipment from a single source.

A. Asbestos: Do not incorporate materials formulated with asbestos in any of the work of this contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents, such as "specialties," "systems," "structure," "finishes,"

"accessories," and similar terms. Such terms are self-explanatory and have well-recognized meanings in the construction industry.

1. "Products" are items purchased for incorporation in the Work, whether purchased for the

Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

2. "Named Products" are items identified by the manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in the manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of the date of the Contract Documents.

3. "Materials" are products that are substantially shaped, cut, worked, mixed, finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, or installed to form a part of the Work.

4. "Equipment" is a product with operational parts, whether motorized or manually operated, that requires service connections, such as wiring or piping.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product List: Prepare a list showing products specified in tabular form acceptable to the

Architect. Include generic names of products required. Include the manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each item listed.

1. Coordinate product list with the Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Schedule of

Submittals.

2. Schedule: Submit with first application for payment.

3. Architect's Action: The Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 2 weeks of receipt of the completed product list. No response within this period constitutes no objection to listed manufacturers or products but does not constitute a waiver of the requirement that products comply with Contract Documents. The Architect's response will include the following:

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-24

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

a. A list of unacceptable product selections, containing a brief explanation of reasons for this action.

A. Source Limitations: To the fullest extent possible, provide products of the same kind from a single source.

1. When specified products are available only from sources that do not, or cannot, produce a quantity adequate to complete project requirements in a timely manner, consult with the Architect to determine the most important product qualities before proceeding.

Qualities may include attributes, such as visual appearance, strength, durability, or compatibility. When a determination has been made, select products from sources producing products that possess these qualities, to the fullest extent possible.

B. Compatibility of Options: When the Contractor is given the option of selecting between 2 or more products for use on the Project, the product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

C. Nameplates: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer's or producer's nameplates or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

1. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surfaces or, where required for observation after installation, on accessible surfaces that are not conspicuous.

2. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of serviceconnected or power-operated equipment. Locate on an easily accessible surface that is inconspicuous in occupied spaces. The nameplate shall contain the following information and other essential operating data: a. Name of product and manufacturer. b. Model and serial number. c. Capacity. d. Speed. e. Ratings.

A. When Contract Documents require installation to comply with manufacturer's recommendations, obtain copies of instructions and distribute to parties involved.

1. Maintain 1 set of complete instructions at the Project Site during installation and until completion.

B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition, and adjust products in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations and to comply with specified requirements.

1. Should Project conditions or specified requirements conflict with manufacturer's recommendations, consult with Architect for clarification.

2. Do not proceed with Work without clear directions.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-25

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

3. Do not omit preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or exempted by Contract Documents.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. General: Receive, store and handle products, materials and equipment per manufacturer's recommendations, and in a manner which shall prevent loss, deterioration and damage.

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at the site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Arrange product deliveries to comply with construction schedules. Coordinate to avoid conflict with Work and conditions at Project Site. a. Deliver products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. b. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with requirements of Contract Documents and reviewed submittals, and that products are properly protected and undamaged.

3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products to prevent soiling or damage to products or packaging.

4. The Contractor is responsible for items damaged by its employees and subcontractor employees, and shall remove such damaged items and provide new without additional cost to Owner.

5. Arrange with material suppliers and manufacturers for delivery and entry of equipment into the building at a suitable time. Inform appropriate parties of the size of building entries available for equipment so assembly of large units of equipment on Project Site may be considered when they are being manufactured.

6. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

7. Deliver products to the site in an undamaged condition in the manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

8. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

9. Store products to comply with manufacturer's recommendations, with seals and labels intact and legible.

10. Provide substantial coverings to protect installed products from damage caused by subsequent construction operations. Remove when no longer needed.

11. Arrange storage to allow access for inspection and verification, and measurement of quantity or counting of units. Periodically inspect to ensure products are undamaged and secured.

12. The Contractor is responsible for damaged, broken, or broken equipment or materials caused by employees of Contractor and subcontractors and shall replace such damaged items without additional cost to Owner.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-26

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

13. Store heavy materials away from the Project structure in a manner that will not endanger the supporting construction.

1.4 Store products subject to damage by the elements above ground, under cover in a weathertight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. Maintain temperature and humidity within range required by manufacturer's instructions.

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, new at the time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for a complete installation and the intended use and effect.

2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

B. Product Selection Procedures: The Contract Documents and governing regulations govern product selection. Procedures governing product selection include the following:

1. Semi-proprietary Specification Requirements: Where Specifications name 2 or more products or manufacturers, provide 1 of the products indicated. No substitutions will be permitted. a. Where Specifications specify products or manufacturers by name, accompanied by the term "or equal" or "or approved equal," comply with the Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

2. Nonproprietary Specifications: When Specifications list products or manufacturers that are available and may be incorporated in the Work, but do not restrict the Contractor to use of these products only, the Contractor may propose any available product that complies with Contract requirements. Comply with Contract Document provisions concerning "substitutions" to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

3. Descriptive Specification Requirements: Where Specifications describe a product or assembly, listing exact characteristics required, with or without use of a brand or trade name, provide a product or assembly that provides the characteristics and otherwise complies with Contract requirements. with performance requirements, provide products that comply with these requirements and are recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. a. Manufacturer's recommendations may be contained in published product literature or by the manufacturer's certification of performance.

5. Compliance with Standards, Codes, and Regulations: Where Specifications only require compliance with an imposed code, standard, or regulation, select a product that complies with the standards, codes, or regulations specified.

6. Visual Matching: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, the

Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-27

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

a. Where no product available within the specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the

Contract Documents concerning "substitutions" for selection of a matching product in another product category.

7. Visual Selection: Where specified product requirements include the phrase "... as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures ..." or a similar phrase, select a product and manufacturer that complies with other specified requirements. The

Architect will select the color, pattern, and texture from the product line selected.

1.9 EXISTING UTILITIES OR SERVICES

A. Provide protection to prevent damage or interference to existing utility or service lines and mains and other existing building equipment and systems.

B. If there is damage to a known existing utility, service line, or existing building equipment or system, the party responsible shall repair or have the damage repaired as directed by the

Owner or Contractor, without additional cost to the Owner.

C. If an unknown utility or service line or main is uncovered, stop Work in that area and notify the utility or service company and Owner to obtain information on how to proceed.

1.10 INTEGRITY OF FIRE, SOUND, AND WEATHERPROOF ASSEMBLIES

A. Fire and Sound Rated Assemblies

1. Spaces formed between assemblies, penetrations through such assemblies, and voids for future penetrations shall be sealed, grouted, filled, or otherwise protected in a manner to maintain fire or sound ratings. Spaces, penetrations, and voids may be as follows. a. Spaces formed between fire or sound rated wall, floor, ceiling, or roof assemblies. b. Penetrations through fire or sound rated wall, floor, ceiling, or roof assemblies by pipe, conduit, ductwork, any other item, or voids provided for possible use of any item.

2. Maintain sound ratings through partitions which have a designed STC rating. General construction practices include requirements specified herein. a. Oversize pipe openings to allow approximately 1/2 inch air space around pipes.

Pack openings to comply with systems specified under Section 07841 or 07900. b. Do not use solid shims.

3. Pull, junction, and outlet boxes in corridor, area separation walls, area separation ceilings, or exterior walls: a. Separate boxes opening on opposite sides of wall by not less than 8 inches in concrete walls, 16 inches in masonry walls or not less than 1 stud space in frame construction walls. b. Seal openings in boxes shut with fire resistant sealant. c. Seal openings between boxes and gypsum board with acoustical sealant.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-28

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

4. Provide flexible metal conduit at electrical connections made to vibrating or motor operated equipment.

5. Use rubber inserts where conduit is fastened to metal members.

1.11 INSTALLATION OF PRODUCTS

A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of products in the applications indicated. Anchor each product securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other Work.

B. Exception Reports: Review any conflict between Contract Documents and manufacturer's instructions with Architect. This "Exception Report" shall be completed with copies to Project

Record File and reviewed at next Progress Meeting.

C. Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

SECTION 016710 - ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT OF MATERIALS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Requirements: To obtain healthy Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) for the completed project and to minimize environmental impacts of the construction and operation, the Contractor during the construction phase of this project shall implement the following procedures singly or in combination:

1. Comply with all requirements of specific IAQ Management Plan during construction.

2. Select products that minimize consumption of non-renewable resources, consume reduced amounts of energy, and minimize amounts of pollution to produce, and employ recycled and/or recyclable materials.

C.

3 . Submit data for all products listed in Part 2 and gain approval prior to placing the order with the manufacturer of the material.

B. The Contractor is responsible to maintain and support these objectives in developing means and methods for performing the work of this Contract and in proposing product substitutions and/or changes to specified processes.

1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: The following health and environmental impact requirements apply to materials specified in their respective Specification Sections.

B. Salvaged/Refurbished Materials: Substitutions with salvaged/refurbished materials are encouraged. All proposed substitutions must be submitted to the Contractor and the

Architect for approval following regular submittal procedures.

Recovered Material Content Requirements:

1. Unless otherwise specified, the following are minimum recovered material content requirements for products listed.

Table A –Minimum Recovered Material Content Requirements 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-29

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

CSI

Div

Material Category

Minimum Recovered

Content (by weight)

Ref

#

4 unit masonry CMU rolled structural shapes, framing steel, made using

EAF (electric arc furnace)

5 steel sheet, hollow structural shapes, pipe, and steel plate made using BOF (basic oxygen furnace) laminated panels (sheathing, misc. plywood applications, underlayment, subflooring)

6

25%

95% 2

25% 2

100% 1 countertops, solid-surface plastic

10% post-consumer plastic plastic lumber, non-structural 75% building insulation, mineral wool batt or board building insulation, fiberglass batt or board building insulation, polyisocyanurate, polyurethane

75% slag

20% glass

6

1

1

9% 1 applied fireproofing -- --

7 roofing, steel -- --

8 roofing, aluminum roofing, fiber (felt) roofing, rubber roofing, plastic or plastic/rubber composite roofing, wood/plastic composite hollow metal doors and frames and glazing frames

--

--

--

--

--

--

-- --

-- --

25%

9 aluminum framing 25% gypsum board gypsum core 25% gypsum board facing paper

100% post-consumer newsprint steel studs, runners, and channels acoustic ceiling tiles ceiling suspension system, steel

--

6

25% 2

25% --

25% 2 ceramic tile rubber flooring carpet, polyester face fiber carpet, nylon face fiber carpet backing, vinyl carpet cushion, bonded polyurethane

--

90%

25% PET

--

--

--

1

1

--

--

15% 1

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-30

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

CSI

Div

Material Category

10

11

12

15 carpet cushion, jute carpet cushion, synthetic fiber carpet cushion, rubber fabric wrapped tack panel core shower and restroom partitions, plastic restroom partitions, metal signage, plastic signage, aluminum signage, steel loading dock bumpers, rubber entrance mats, rubber office furniture, PET fabric non-pressure pipe, steel non-pressure pipe, HDPE non-pressure pipe, PVC

D.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Minimum Recovered

Content (by weight)

40% burlap

100% carpet fabrication scrap

60% tire rubber

Ref

#

1

1

1

20% 1

25%

80%

25%

25%

1

1

1

1

100% 6

100%

--

--

--

--

6

--

--

--

--

-- --

References for Table A, “Minimum Recovered Material Content Requirements” are as follows.

1. US EPA Comprehensive Guideline for Procurement of Products Containing

Recovered Materials (latest update as of July 5, 2001).

2. This standard references Steel Recycling Institute published industry averages for recycled steel content. Meeting this criteria ensures that products meet or exceed the industry trends for recycling.

3.

4.

Green Seal Standard “Watering Hoses (GC-01)”, Second Edition, April 4, 1994.

Texas Department of Transportation recommendations for recycled content in asphalt. Contact Texas DOT for additional information.

5.

6.

EPA Recovered Materials Advisory Notice (RMAN), August 28, 2001.

Products that meet this standard are widely available throughout North America.

E. VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) Content Limits:

1. Unless otherwise specified, the following are maximum VOC (volatile organic compound) content limits for the products listed.

2. VOC content is measured in grams/liter (g/l), less the volume of water, exempt compounds and tinting as defined by the EPA’s proposed AIM VOC rule)

Table B – Maximum VOC Content Limits 

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-31

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

CSI

Div

Material Category

3

5

6

7 concrete curing compound concrete water proofing sealer adhesives, metal-to-metal coatings, metal, baked coatings, metal, air-dried coating stripper, metal subfloor adhesives multipurpose construction adhesive structural wood member adhesive waterproof glue contact adhesive plastic cement welding plastic laminate adhesive wood glues traffic coatings membrane roofing adhesive non-membrane roofing adhesive roof coatings sealant, architectural adhesives, plastic forms

8 structural glazing adhesive drywall and panel adhesives adhesive, ceramic tile wood flooring adhesive gypsum board and panel adhesive adhesive, carpet adhesive, carpet pad carpet seam sealer adhesive, rubber flooring adhesive, resilient flooring tile, including VCT adhesive, cove base primer, sealer, undercoating

9

Paint, general interior (flat)

Paint, general interior (non-flat)

Paint, general exterior (flat)

Paint, general exterior (non-flat)

Paint, low solids

Paint, anti-corrosive exterior paint, primer, sealer, and undercoats, including quick dry enamel

Paint, chemical storage tank coatings semi-transparent stains transparent finishes, varnish transparent finishes, lacquer wood filler wood stains

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Maximum

VOC Content

Ref

#

350 g/l 1

250 g/l 1

30 g/l 5,7

275 g/l 1

340 g/l 1

200 g/l 1

50 g/l 1

70g/l 5,7

140 g/l 1

170 g/l 5,7

250 g/l 1,5,7

250 g/l 1

20 g/l

20 g/l

150 g/l 1

250 g/l 1,5,7

300 g/l 5,7

250 g/l 1

250 g/l 1,7

120 g/l 5

100 g/l 1,5,7

50 g/l 1

65g/l 5,7

100 g/l

50 g/l 6

50 g/l 1

50 g/l 5,7

50 g/l 8

60 g/l 5,7

50 g/l 1

50 g/l 5,7

200 g/l 1

50 g/l 3

150 g/l 3

50 g/l 3

150 g/l 3

120 g/l 1

250 g/l 4

200 g/l 1

420 g/l 1

350 g/l 7

350 g/l 1,7

550 g/l 1

275 g/l 1

250 g/l 1

GR-32

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

CSI

Div

Material Category

Maximum

VOC Content

Ref

#

250 g/l 1 wood water-proofing sealer wood floor coating wood flooring adhesive

100 g/l

150 g/l

1

5

F. References for Table B, “Maximum VOC Content Limits” are as follows.

1. South Coast Air Quality Management District, Rules and Regulations effective date of July 1, 2005 amendment date of January 7, 2005. Rules referenced are

1107 Metal Coatings, 1113 Architectural Coatings, 1136 Wood Products

Coatings, 1145 Plastic, Rubber, and Glass Coatings, 1168 Adhesive Application.

2.

3.

4.

Compliant with Standard specification requirements.

Green Seal Standard “Paints (GS-11)”, First Edition, May 20, 1993.

Green Seal Standard “Anti-Corrosive Paints (GC-03)”, First Edition, July 20,

1994.

5.

6.

Green Seal Standard “Commercial Adhesives (GS-36), October 19, 2000.

Carpet & Rug Institute “Green Tag” labeling criteria. VOCs are given in milligrams per meter squared, as determined by ASTM chamber testing.

7. Bay Area Air Quality Management District (California), Regulation 8 “Organic

Compounds”: Rule 3 Architectural Coatings, November 4, 1998 and Rule 51

Adhesive and Sealant Products, May 2, 2001.

8. No standard is sited for this requirement.

SECTION 017323 - SEQUENCE OF FINISH INSTALLATION

A. General: Project schedule shall address construction scheduling/sequencing requirements and procedures necessary to optimize Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) levels for the completed

Project.

1. Scheduling: Contractor’s Project Schedule for finish applications shall allow for: a. Dissipation of emissions from finish materials that off-gas deleterious materials during curing. b. Separation of adsorptive finishes from any potential contaminants during material storage and installation. c. Sequencing installation of materials to comply with IAQ requirements of this

Section.

1.4 DEFINITIONS:

A. Type 1 Finishes: Materials and finishes which have a potential for short-term levels of off gassing from chemicals inherent in their manufacturing process installation techniques, or

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-33

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

which are applied in a form requiring vehicles or carriers for spreading which release a high level of particulate matter in the process of installation and/or curing. Type 1 Finishes include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Composite wood products, specifically including particleboard from which millwork, wood paneling, doors or furniture may be fabricated.

2. Adhesives, sealants, and glazing compounds, specifically those with petrochemical vehicles or carriers.

3. Wood preservatives, finishes, and paint.

4. Control and/or expansion joint fillers.

5. All hard finishes requiring adhesive installation.

6. Gypsum board and associated finish processes.

B. Type 2 Finishes: Absorbent materials and finishes which are woven, fibrous, or porous in nature and tend to adsorb chemicals off-gassed by Type 1 Finishes or may be adversely affected by particulates. Type 2 Finishes include, but are not limited to the following:

1. Carpet and padding.

3. Insulation exposed to the airstream.

4. Acoustic ceiling materials.

5. Fabric covered acoustic wall panels.

C. Materials that can be categorized as both Type 1 and Type 2 Finishes shall be treated as

Type 1 Finishes.

D. Materials that are categorized as neither Type 1 nor Type 2 are not bound by the requirements of this Section.

1.5 PREPARATION:

A. Certify in writing to the Architect that interior environmental control has been implemented as specified below and that required conditions are being maintained, and obtain the Architect approval before starting installation of interior finishes.

3.2 SEQUENCING FINISH INSTALLATION

A. Material Storage: Finish materials that are stored prior to installation shall be stored in such a manner that air-borne chemical and/or particulate contaminants cannot be transferred from

Type 1 Finishes to Type 2 Finishes.

B. Exemptions: Substrate materials which must be in-place in order to install any Type 1 Finish are exempt from sequencing requirements defined below. Ventilation requirements are not exempt for this condition.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-34

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

C. Type 1 Finishes: Install Type 1 Finishes in a manner compliant with the following:

1. Allow wet-applied Type 1 Finishes to fully cure prior to commencing installation of adsorbent materials, whether Type 1 or Type 2.

2. Install all Type 1 Finishes prior to commencing installation of Type 2 Finishes.

3. Allow Type 1 materials that are known to off-gas deleterious vapors, whether due to manufacturing processes or installation techniques, to fully cure prior to installation of

Type 2 Finishes. Such materials can include, but are not limited to, composite wood, carpet and cushion, resilient flooring, etc.

4. Remove particulate matter from interior space (whether air-borne or on a surface) prior to installation of Type 2 Finishes.

5. Comply with all ventilation requirements as required by this Section and identified below.

D. Type 2 Finishes: Install Type 2 Finishes in a manner compliant with the following:

1. Do not install Type 2 Finishes until installation of Type 1 Finishes is complete and

Flushout has been performed.

2. Protect Type 2 Finishes from contamination by chemical off-gassing and/or air-borne particulates during and subsequent to installation.

3. Avoid installation of Type 1 Finishes during Type 2 Finish installation period. (Refer to ventilation requirements if this condition is unavoidable.)

4. Comply with all ventilation requirements as required by this Section and identified below.

E. Ventilation: Provide ventilation of interior space during finish installation as follows, at a minimum:

1. Ventilation shall comply with Article “Interior Environmental Control” of this Section and all other ventilation requirements outlined in this Project Manual.

2. Provide ventilation for the entire duration of installation and curing of wet-applied Type 1

Finishes.

3. Provide ventilation for the entire duration of all periods in which Type 2 Finishes are present during installation of Type 1 materials.

4. Provide ventilation at any time when it is desired to dissipate chemical off-gassing emissions and/or air-borne particulates out of the interior environment.

5. Provide ventilation during all periods in which chemical off-gassing and/or air-borne particulate matter pose a health risk to any persons present.

3.2 INTERIOR ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL:

A. Provide and maintain controlled interior environment prior to and during installation of interior finish materials as required by this Section.

B. Ventilation provided during finish installation shall comply with the requirements of Section

C. Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction."

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-35

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during construction period as specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and

Controls," install filter media of types required and specified for the final installation according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet for the air-handling system used during construction.

2. Replace all air filters immediately prior to occupancy. Replacement air filter shall be of types required and specified for the final installation and according to ASHRAE 52.2

SECTION 017326 - ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES

1.1 GENERAL

A. Coordinate work of trades and schedule elements of alterations and renovation work by procedures and methods to expedite completion of the Work.

B. Patch, repair and refinish existing items to remain, to the specified condition for each material, with a workmanlike transition to adjacent new items of construction.

C. Assign the work of moving, removal, cutting and patching, to trades qualified to perform the work in a manner to cause least damage to each type of work, and provide means of returning surfaces to appearance of new work.

D. Perform cutting and removal work to remove minimum necessary, and in a manner to avoid damage to adjacent work.

1. Cut finish surfaces by methods to terminate surfaces in a straight line at a natural point of division.

E. Protect existing finishes, equipment, and adjacent work which is scheduled to remain, from damage.

F. General Requirements that Work be Complete:

1. Provide same products or types of construction as that in existing structure, as needed to patch, extend or match existing work.

2. Generally Contract Documents will not define products or standards of workmanship present in existing construction; Subcontractor shall determine products by inspection and any necessary testing, and workmanship by use of the existing as a sample of comparison.

3. Presence of a product, finish, or type of construction, requires that patching, extending or matching shall be performed as necessary to make work complete and consistent to identical standards of quality.

G. Patch and extend existing work using skilled mechanics who are capable of matching existing quality of workmanship. Quality of patched or extended work shall not be less than that specified for new work.

H. Where partitions are removed, patch floors, walls, and ceilings with finish materials to match existing.

1. Where removal of partitions results in adjacent spaces becoming one, rework floors and ceilings to provide smooth planes without breaks, steps, or bulkheads.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-36

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

2. Where extreme change of plane of two inches or more occurs, request instructions from

Architect as to method of making transition.

I. Patch and replace any portion of an existing finished surface which were removed, found to be damaged, lifted, discolored, or show other imperfections as a result of performing the work under this Contract, with matching materials.

J. When new work abuts or finishes flush with existing work, make a smooth and workmanlike transition. Patched work shall match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance so that the patch or transition is invisible at a distance of five feet.

1. When finishes surfaces are cut in such a way that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface in a neat manner along a straight line at a natural line of division, and provide trim appropriate to finished surface.

SECTION 017329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

1.1 GENERAL:

A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements without first contacting the Architect for approval.

B. Operational Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform as intended. Do not cut and patch operating elements or related components in a manner that would result in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in the Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that would result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove and replace construction cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

D. Existing Warranties: Replace, patch, and repair material and surfaces cut or damaged by methods and with materials in such a manner as not to void any warranties required or existing.

1. Use materials identical to existing materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible if identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used. If identical materials are not available or cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existing adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect and are compatible with existing material. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

F. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

G. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage.

Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

H. Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-37

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. Cut existing construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction activities and the subsequent fitting and patching required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

I. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Where possible, review proposed procedures with the original

Installer; comply with the original Installer's recommendations.

1. In general, where cutting, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finished side toward the concealed surfaces.

3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a carborundum saw or a diamond core drill.

J. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specified tolerances.

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of the installation.

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Where removal of walls or partitions extend from one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniform color and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Patch, repair, or rehang existing ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface of uniform appearance.

K. Fire and Sound Rated Construction: Where walls, floors, or other construction to be cut and patched have fire-resistance or sound transmission ratings, restore rating in conformance with governing standards.

L. Paint: Where walls, floors, or other construction have been cut and patched paint is to match original.

SECTION 017419 - WASTE MATERIALS MANAGEMENT AND RECYCLING

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. This Section includes required salvage and recycling of the following waste materials in order to comply with local jurisdiction and Landlord requirements. The Contractor shall implement procedures to minimize the creation of construction and demolition waste on the jobsite.

Waste disposal in landfills shall be minimized. The Contractor shall develop a Waste

Management Plan and submit for review by the Owner and Architect. This section applies to all such listed waste materials produced during the course of this Contract:

1. Metals: Metal scrap including iron, steel, copper, brass, and aluminum.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-38

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

2. Untreated Wood: Unpainted, untreated dimensional lumber and wood shipping pallets.

3. Gypsum Wallboard Scrap: Excess drywall construction materials including cuttings, other scrap, and excess materials.

4. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

5. Metal Suspension System: Separate metal members including trim, and other metals from acoustical panels and tile and sort with other metals.

6. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips. a. Store clean, dry carpetin a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet

Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

7. Carpet Tile: Remove debris, trash, and adhesive. a. Stack tile on pallet and store clean, dry carpet in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

8. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

9. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.

10. Salvaged Materials: Reusable lumber, fixtures, and building supplies.

11. Cardboard: Clean, corrugated cardboard such as used for packaging, etc.

12. Paper: Discarded office refuse such as unwanted files, correspondence, etc.

13. Plastic Buckets: Containers for various liquid and semi-solid or viscous construction materials and compounds.

14. Beverage Containers: Aluminum, glass, and plastic containers.

15. Glass: Glass from windows and doors.

16. Other Mixed Construction and Demolition Waste: Solid waste resulting solely from construction, remodeling, repair, or demolition operations on pavement, buildings, or other structures exclusive of waste materials listed herewith.

17. Non-Recyclable Waste: Collect and segregate non-recyclable waste for delivery to a permitted landfill site.

SECTION 017700 - PROJECT CLOSEOUT REQUIREMENTS

A. Prerequisites For Substantial Completion

1. General: Prior to requesting Architect's or Engineer's inspection for certification of substantial completion, as required by the General Conditions (for either the entire work or portion thereof), complete the following and list known exceptions in request:

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-39

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

a. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. b. Submit special guarantees, warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, final certifications and similar documents. c. Obtain and submit occupancy permits, final inspection/test certificates, and similar releases enabling Owner's full and unrestricted use of the work and access to services and utilities. d. Submit Start up test performance and reports, and test and balance reports. e. Submit Maintenance Instructions. f. Transmittal of required project construction records to Owner. g. Discontinue (or changeover) and remove from the project site temporary protection, facilities and services, along with construction tools and facilities, and similar elements. h. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements. i. Complete the final cleaning. j. Touchup and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.

B Prerequisites For Final Acceptance

1. General: Prior to requesting Architect's or Engineer's final inspection for certification of final acceptance and final payment, as required by the General Conditions, complete the following and list known exceptions (if any) in request: a. Complete work shown on final punch list. b. Submit record drawings, shop drawings, maintenance manuals, and similar physical items to Owner. c. Submit consent of surety to final payment. d. Deliver tools, spare parts, and similar physical items to Owner.

1. When the Owner has determined that the Work is acceptable under the Contract

Documents and the Contract fully performed, Contractor shall prepare and submit the final Application for Payment to Owner as specified in Conditions of the Contract and together with the following: a. Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims. b. Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens. c. Contractor's lien waiver in the full amount of the Contract Sum. d. Lien waivers from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and major material suppliers who have furnished materials or labor for the Contractor or a subcontractor. Lien waivers shall be in the full amount of the contract involved.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-40

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

e. Evidence of compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1) Required Certificates of Inspection.

D. Project Record Documents

1. Maintain at Project Site for Owner, one copy of Record Documents including Drawings,

Specifications, and Modifications to the Contract, plus Engineer's Clarifications, or other written instructions, reviewed submittals, and test reports to record actual construction conditions as specified in Conditions of the Contract.

2. Project Record Documents include, but are not limited to: a. Marked-up copies of Contract Documents including Drawings and Specifications. b. Copies of Construction Change Directives and other Modifications issued. c. Copies of Reviewed Contractor's submittals, including:

1) Reviewed product data.

2) Reviewed shop drawings.

4) Copies of quality control submittals specified herein.

3. Other information specified in individual Sections.

4. Format for record Project Manual: Specifications, Construction Change Directives, and other 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch data, bound within 3 ring binders identified on binding and cover with Project name. a. Legibly mark to record actual construction including manufacturers and catalog numbers used, suppliers of each product, and revisions to execution procedures. b. Include Construction Change Directives and other modifications.

5. Format for record Drawings: Legibly mark revisions on Record Drawings. a. Location of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the structure. b. Field changes of dimension and detail. c. Changes made by Construction Change Directive or other modification document. d. Details not on original Contract Drawings.

E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals

1. Submit operating and maintenance manuals not less than 30 days before Substantial

Completion is scheduled or anticipated.

2. Assemble data and operating and maintenance instructions for specified equipment and materials requiring operating and maintenance manual information. Include the following as applicable.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-41

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

3. Contents:

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

a. Manufacturer, subcontractor, and supplier of each item, including address and phone number. c. Reviewed and accepted shop drawings folded to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches and bind in manuals. d. Source of maintenance materials and parts. e. Complete operating instructions for equipment.

4. Quantity, Binding, and Format: a. Quantity: Submit 4 sets. b. Title page in each binder, indicating date manual submitted, name and address of

Project, and name and address of Contractor. c. Table of contents for complete Operating and Maintenance Manuals in each binder. d. Index tabs between items. e. Provide data in typed form on 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch sheets or on larger sheets folded to 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches. Delete or line out irrelevant data. f. Binders: Loose leaf type with three, 3 inch locking rings. Identification insert on outside binding edge.

G. Submittal Format: Assemble and bind data sheets in 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch, 3-ring binders.

1. Provide table of contents and index tabs labeled by Project Manual section numbers.

2. Submit 3 copies.

H. Special Warranty Manuals

1. Submit manual containing specified Special Warranties not less than 30 days before

Substantial Completion is scheduled or anticipated. a. In no case shall warranty period start before Date of Substantial Completion. b. Assemble and bind warranties in 8-1/2 inch by 11 inch, 3-ring binders. c. Provide table of contents and index tabs labeled by Project Manual section numbers. d. Submit 3 notarized copies.

2. For items of Work delayed beyond Date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within 10 days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-42

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. General: Special cleaning for specific units of work is specified in sections of Division 2 through 16. General cleaning during progress of work is specified in General Conditions and as temporary services in "Temporary Facilities" section of this Division. Provide final cleaning of the work, at time indicated, consisting of cleaning each surface or unit of work to normal "clean" condition expected for a first-class building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturers' instructions for cleaning operations.

The following are examples, but not by way of limitation, of cleaning levels required: a. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and window/door glass, to a polished condition, removing substances which are noticable as vision-obscuring materials. Replace broken glass and damaged transparent materials. c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes, to a dirt-free condition, free of dust, stains, films and similar noticable distracting substances. Except as otherwise indicated; avoid disturbance of natural weathering of exterior surfaces.

Restore reflective surfaces to original reflective condition. d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment clean, including elevator equipment and similar equipment; remove excess lubrication and other substances. e. Remove debris from limited-access spaces including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics and similar spaces. f. Clean concrete floors in non-occupied spaces broom clean. g. Vacuum clean carpeted surfaces and similar soft surfaces. h. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains including those resulting from water exposure. i. Clean light fixtures and lamps so as to function with full efficiency. j. Clean project site (yard and grounds), including landscape, development areas, of litter and foreign substances resulting from construction work. Sweep new and resurfaced paved areas to a broom-clean condition; remove stains, petrochemical spills and other foreign deposits. Rake grounds which are neither planted nor paved, to a smooth, even-textured surface.

J. Removal of Protection: Except as otherwise indicated or requested by Architect/Engineer, remove temporary protection devices and facilities which were installed during course of the work to protect previously completed work during remainder of construction period.

K. Compliances: Comply with safety standards and governing regulations for cleaning operations. Do not burn waste materials at site, or bury debris or excess materials on

Owner's property, or discharge volatile or other harmful or dangerous materials into drainage systems; remove waste materials from site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

L. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-43

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

017836 - WARRANTIES

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A. Related Damages and Losses: When correcting failed or damaged warranted construction, remove and replace construction that has been damaged as a result of such failure or must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of warranted construction.

B. Reinstatement of Warranty: When Work covered by a warranty has failed and been corrected by replacement or rebuilding, reinstate the warranty by written endorsement. The reinstated warranty shall be equal to the original warranty with an equitable adjustment for depreciation.

C. Replacement Cost: Upon determination that Work covered by a warranty has failed, replace or rebuild the Work to an acceptable condition complying with requirements of the Contract

Documents. The Contractor is responsible for the cost of replacing or rebuilding defective

Work regardless of whether the Owner has benefited from use of the Work through a portion of its anticipated useful service life.

D. Owner's Recourse: Expressed warranties made to the Owner are in addition to implied warranties and shall not limit the duties, obligations, rights, and remedies otherwise available under the law. Expressed warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on the time in which the Owner can enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies.

1. Rejection of Warranties: The Owner reserves the right to reject warranties and to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract

Documents.

E. Where the Contract Documents require a special warranty, or similar commitment on the Work or part of the Work, the Owner reserves the right to refuse to accept the Work, until the

Contractor presents evidence that entities required to countersign such commitments are willing to do so.

F. When the Contract Documents require the Contractor, or the Contractor and a subcontractor, supplier or manufacturer to execute a special warranty, prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution by the required parties.

Submit a draft to the Owner, through the Architect, for approval prior to final execution.

SECTION 018113 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with certain USGBC

LEED prerequisites and credits needed for Project to obtain LEED – Certification based on

LEED-2009 Commercial Interiors depending on the effectiveness of achieving the certification.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: In addition to the Submittal required under LEED Submittal section provide additional LEED submittals as follows;.

B. Recycled Content: Submittals for all materials with recycled content (excluding MEP systems equipment and components) must include the following documentation:

1. Cost of each material or product, excluding cost of labor and equipment for installation

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-44

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

2. Manufacturer’s product data, product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer verifying the percentage of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content (by weight) of each material or product

3. An electronic spreadsheet that tabulates the Project’s total materials cost and combined recycled content value (defined as the sum of the post-consumer recycled content value plus one-half of the pre-consumer recycled content value) expressed as a percentage of total materials cost. This spreadsheet shall be submitted every third month with the

Contractor’s Certificate and Application for Payment. It should indicate, on an ongoing basis, line items for each material, including cost, pre-consumer recycled content, postconsumer recycled content, and combined recycled content value.

C. Regional Materials: Submittals for all products or materials expected to contribute to the regional calculation (excluding MEP systems equipment and components) must include the following documentation:

1. Cost of each material or product, excluding cost of labor and equipment for installation

2. Location of product manufacture and distance from point of manufacture to the Project

Site

3. Location of point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material in each product and distance from the point of extraction, harvest, or recovery to the Project Site

4. Manufacturer’s product data, product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer verifying the location and distance from the Project Site to the point of manufacture for each regional material

5. Manufacturer’s product data, product literature, or a letter from the manufacturer verifying the location and distance from the Project Site to the point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each regional material or product, including, at a minimum, gravel and fill, planting materials, concrete, masonry, and GWB

6. An electronic spreadsheet that tabulates the Project’s total materials cost and regional materials value, expressed as a percentage of total materials cost. This spreadsheet shall be submitted every third month with the Contractor’s Certificate and Application for

Payment. It should indicate on an ongoing basis, line items for each material, including cost, location of manufacture, distance from manufacturing plant to the Project Site, location of raw material extraction, and distance from extraction point to the Project Site.

D. Certified Wood: Submittals for all wood-based materials must include a statement indicating the cost of each product containing FSC Certified wood, exclusive of labor and delivery costs, and third party verification of certification from one of the following: wood products were made from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSCaccredited certification body to comply with FSC 1.2 "Principles and Criteria." Letter from approved Canadian Standards Association (CSA) supplier for verifying compliance with CSA Standard Z809-02 and Standard CSA Plus 1163.

2. Documentation from the supplier verifying that 100% of the wood-based content originates from SFI third-party certified forest lands, identifying the company or companies that performed the SFI third-party certification for both the forest land management and the certified product content.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-45

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

E. Interior Adhesives and Sealants: Submittals for all field-applied adhesives and sealants, which have a potential impact on indoor air, must include manufacturer’s MSDSs or other Product

Data highlighting VOC content.

1. Provide manufacturers’ documentation verifying all adhesives used to apply laminates, whether shop-applied or field-applied, contain no urea-formaldehyde.

F. Interior Paints and Coatings: Submittals for all field-applied paints and coatings, which have a potential impact on indoor air, must include manufacturer’s MSDSs or other Product Data highlighting VOC content

G. Exterior Paints and Coatings: Submittals for all field-applied paints and coatings, which have a potential impact on ambient air quality, must include manufacturer’s MSDSs or other manufacturer’s Product Data highlighting VOC content.

H. Floorcoverings:

1 Carpet Systems: Submittals for all carpet must include the following: a. A copy of an assessment from the Building for Environmental and Economic

Sustainability (BEES) software model, either Version 3.0 or 4.0, with parameters of the model set as described by this specification section. b. Resilient Flooring: Submittals for all resilient floorcovering must include manufacturer’s product data verifying certification under either the Greenguard for

Children & Schools or FloorScore indoor emissions testing program.

I. Composite Wood and Agrifiber Binders: Submittals for all composite wood and agrifiber products (including but not limited to particleboard, wheatboard, strawboard, agriboard products, engineered wood components, solid-core wood doors, OSB, MDF, and plywood products) must include manufacturer’s product data verifying that these products contain no urea-formaldehyde resins.

J. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide a spreadsheet in an electronic file indicating the total cost for the Project and the total cost of building materials used for the Project, as follows:

1. Not more than 60 days after the Preconstruction Meeting, the General Contractor shall provide to the Owner and Architect a preliminary schedule of materials costs for all materials used for the Project organized by specification section. Exclude labor costs and all mechanical, electrical, and plumbing (MEP) systems materials and labor costs.

Include the following:

2. Identify each recycled-content material, its post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content as a percentage the product’s weight, its cost, its combined recycled content value (defined as the sum of the post-consumer recycled content value plus one-half of the pre-consumer recycled content value), and the total combined recycled content value for all materials as a percentage of total materials costs.

3. Identify each regional material, its cost, its manufacturing location, the distance of this location from the Project site, the source location for each raw material component of the material, the distance of these extraction locations from the Project site, and the total value of regional materials as a percentage of total materials costs.

4. Identify each wood-based material, its cost, the total wood-based materials cost, each

FSC Certified wood material, its cost, and the total value of FSC Certified wood as a percentage of total wood-based materials costs.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-46

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

K. LEED Action Plans: Provide preliminary submittals within 10 days of date established for the

Notice to Proceed indicating how the following requirements will be met:

1. Credit 1: Site Selection.

2. Credit EQ 4.1, 4.2 and 4.3: Low emitted materials.

"Construction Waste Management and Disposal."

4. Credit MR 4: List of proposed materials with recycled content. Indicate cost, postconsumer recycled content, and pre-consumer recycled content for each product having recycled content.

5. Credit MR 5: List of proposed regional materials. Identify each regional material, including its source, cost, and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. a. Identify each regionally manufactured material, including its source and cost. b. Identify each regionally extracted and manufactured material, including its source and cost.

6. Credit MR 7: List of proposed certified wood products. Indicate each product containing certified wood, including its source and cost of certified wood products.

7. Credit EQ 3.1 and 3.2: Construction indoor-air-quality management plan.

L LEED Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit reports comparing actual construction and purchasing activities with LEED action plans for the following:

1. Credit MR 2: Waste reduction progress reports complying with Division 01 Section "

Waste Materials Management and Recycling."

2. Credit MR 4: Recycled content. manufactured materials.

4. Credit MR 7: Certified wood products.

M. LEED Documentation Submittals:

1. Credit WE 1: Product Data for plumbing fixtures indicating water consumption.

2. Credit MR 2: Comply with Division 01 Section " Waste Materials Management and

Recycling"

3. Credit MR 4: Product data and certification letter indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content for products having recycled content. Include statement indicating costs for each product having recycled content.

4. Credit MR 5: Product data for regional materials indicating location and distance from

Project of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating cost for each regional material and the fraction by weight that is considered regional. Product data indicating location of material manufacturer for regionally manufactured materials. Include statement

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-47

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

indicating cost for each regionally manufactured material and for each regionally extracted and manufactured material. a. Include statement indicating distance from manufacturer to Project for each regionally manufactured material. b. Include statement indicating location of and distance from Project to point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material used in regionally extracted and manufactured materials.

5. Credit MR 7: Product data and chain-of-custody certificates for products containing certified wood. Include statement indicating cost for each certified wood product.

Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality, including Product Data and performance for equipment in Division 23 Sections.

7. Credit EQ 3: a. b. c.

Construction indoor-air-quality management plan.

Product data for temporary filtration media.

Product data for filtration media used during occupancy. weatherproofing system indicating VOC content of each product used. Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1168, GS-36.

9. Credit EQ 4.2: Product data for paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system indicating chemical composition and VOC content of each product used.

Indicate VOC content in g/L calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1113, GS-03 and

GS-11. used according to Carpet And Rug Institute’s Green Label Plus program.

11. Credit EQ 4.4: Product data for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues indicating that they do not contain urea-formaldehyde resin.

12. Credit EQ 7.1 and EQ 7.2: Product Data and Shop Drawings for sensors and control system use to monitor and control room temperature and humidity

A. General: Perform the work of this Section as a supplement and in accordance with applicable requirements of Division 1 “Quality Assurance And Control.”

B. Preconstruction Meeting: After award of Contract and prior to the commencement of the Work, schedule and conduct meeting with Owner, Architect, and all Subcontractors to discuss the

Construction Waste Management Plan, the required Construction Indoor Air Quality (IAQ)

Management Plan, and all other Sustainable Design Requirements. The purpose of this meeting is to develop a mutual understanding of the Project’s Sustainable Design

Requirements and coordination of the Contractor’s management of these requirements with the Contracting Officer and the Construction Quality Manager.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-48

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

C. Construction Job Conferences: The status of compliance with the Sustainable Design

Requirements of these specifications will be an agenda item at all regular job meetings conducted during the course of work at the site.

1.4 PRODUCT ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Recycled Content of Materials:

1. Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content value plus half the pre-consumer recycled content value constitutes a minimum of 20% of the cost of materials used for the Project, exclusive of all MEP equipment, labor, and delivery costs. The Contractor shall make all attempts to maximize the procurement of materials with recycled content. a. The post-consumer recycled content value of a material shall be determined by dividing the weight of post-consumer recycled content by the total weight of the material and multiplying by the cost of the material. b. The pre-consumer recycled content value of a material shall be determined by dividing the weight of pre-consumer recycled content by the total weight of the material and multiplying by the cost of the material. c. Do not include mechanical and electrical components in the calculations. d. Do not include labor and delivery costs in the calculations. e. Recycled content of materials shall be defined according to ISO 14021 –

Environmental Labels and declarations – Self-declared environmental claims

(Type II environmental labeling. f. Utilize all on-site existing paving materials that are scheduled for demolition as granulated fill, and include the cost of this material had it been purchased in the calculations for recycled content value.

B. Regional Materials: Provide a minimum of 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are manufactured and extracted/harvested within a 500 mile radius of the project site, exclusive of labor and delivery costs. The Contractor shall make all attempts to maximize the procurement of materials within this specified 500 mile radius.

1.5 RECYCLED CONTENT OF MATERIALS

A. Credit MR 4: Provide building materials with recycled content such that post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content constitutes a minimum of 10 and 20 percent of cost of materials used for Project.

1. Cost of post-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of post-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item.

2. Cost of pre-consumer recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing weight of pre-consumer recycled content in the item by total weight of the item and multiplying by cost of the item.

3. Mechanical, electrical and plumbing components, and specialty items such as elevators shall not be included in this calculation.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-49

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A.

Credit MR 5: Provide a minimum of 10 and 20 percent of building materials (by cost) that are regional materials.

A. Credit MR 7: Provide a minimum of 50 percent (by cost) of wood-based materials that are produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."

1. Wood-based materials include, but are not limited to, the following materials when made from wood, engineered wood products, or wood-based panel products: c. Particleboard. d. Plywood h. Wood veneer wall covering. l. Furniture.

A. Credit EQ 4.1: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1168.

B. Credit EQ 4.2: For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and coatings that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to SCAQMD Rule #1168 .

C. Credit EQ 4.3: Product Data for carpet products indicating VOC content of each product used.

D. Credit EQ 4.4: Do not use composite wood or agrifiber products or adhesives that contain urea-formaldehyde resin.

END OF GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS GR-50

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes.

1.

2.

Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure.

Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2

B. Work Regulations:

1. General: Refer to and abide by building rules and regulations related to demolition work.

SUBMITTALS

A. Landfill Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of hazardous wastes by a landfill

B. facility licensed to accept hazardous wastes.

Photographs or videos of existing conditions of surfaces, equipment, and adjacent improvements that might be misconstrued as damage related to removal operations. File with Architect prior to start of work.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Coordinate with the Owner to establish a list of items that will remain the Owner's property, all other demolished materials shall become the Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site with further disposition at the Contractor's option. Items to remain the Owner's property shall be carefully removed and protected, and stored at a location as directed by the Owner.

1.4 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Occupancy: Owner will occupy areas of the building immediately adjacent to and below areas of selective demolition. Conduct selective demolition work in manner that will minimize need for disruption of Owner's normal operations. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner of demolition activities that will affect Owner's normal operations.

B. Condition of Building: To establish a firm bid, Bidders shall investigate all areas where demolition work occurs to determine extent of work.

C. Partial Removal: Items of salvable value to the Contractor, except for items indicated to be removed and stored, and items which the Owner schedules to be turned over to him, may be removed from the structure as the work progresses. Salvaged items must be transported from the site as they are removed. Storage or sale of removed items on the site will not be permitted. Contractor cannot assume any salvage value for any existing items on the premises.

D. Protections: Provide temporary barricades and other forms of protection to protect

Owner's personnel and general public from injury due to selective demolition work.

1. Provide protective measures as required to provide free and safe passage of

Owner's personnel and general public to occupied portions of building.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

2.

3.

Erect temporary covered passageways where overhead work is required.

Provide shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of structure or element to be demolished and adjacent facilities or work to remain.

4. Protect from damage existing finish work that is to remain in place and becomes exposed during demolition operations.

Protect floors with suitable coverings when necessary. 5.

6. Construct temporary insulated partitions where required to separate areas where noisy or dirt or dust and construction operations are performed.

Damages: Promptly repair damages caused to adjacent facilities by demolition work. E.

F. Traffic: Conduct selective demolition operations and debris removal to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities.

1. Do not close, block, or otherwise obstruct streets, walks, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from authorities having jurisdiction.

Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by governing regulations.

2. Maintain exiting requirements.

G. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

H. Utility Services: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during demolition operations.

1, Do not interrupt utilities serving occupied or used facilities, except when authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide temporary services

2, during interruptions to existing utilities, as acceptable to governing authorities.

Maintain fire protection services during selective demolition operations.

I. Environmental Controls: Use temporary enclosures, and other methods to limit dust and dirt migration. Comply with governing regulations pertaining to environmental protection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION:

A. Prior to commencement of demolition work, inspect areas in which work will be performed. Photograph existing conditions which could be misconstrued as damage resulting from demolition work; file with Architect prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Provide shoring, bracing, or support to prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of areas to be demolished and adjacent facilities to remain.

1. Cease operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of structure appears to be endangered. Take precautions to support structure until determination is made for continuing operations.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Cover and protect furniture, equipment, and fixtures from soilage or damage when demolition work is performed in areas where such items have not been removed.

3. Temporary Partition And Enclosures: Erect and maintain temporary partitions and closures as required to prevent spread of dust or fumes to occupied portions of the building.

4. a. Construct temporary partitions and enclosures of minimum 3-1/2-inch metal studs, 5/8-inch fire rated drywall (joints taped and finished Level 4) on both sides. Fill partition cavity with sound-deadening insulation. b. Tape around all penetrations of partitions to ensure infectious disease, dust and flume tightness.

Finish: Provide a Level 4 finish on all partitions and enclosures. c. e.

Locate, identify, stub off, and disconnect utility services that are not indicated to remain.

Paint surfaces facing Owner's occupied spaces with one coat primer and one coat semigloss latex enamel. Colors as selected by the Architect. a. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Owner if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover.

Salvaged Items: Comply with the following: B.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers.

Store items in a secure area.

Transport items to secure storage area.

Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. General: Perform selective demolition work in a systematic manner. Use such methods as required to complete work indicated on Drawings in accordance with selective demolition schedule and governing regulations. Perform all selective demolition to accommodate new work including means and methods.

B. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Architect in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Architect, rearrange selective demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay.

C. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by demolition operations, as directed by Architect or governing authorities. Return adjacent areas to condition existing prior to the start of work.

D. Noise Control: Conduct work with a minimum of inconvenience to the Owner, and the public, and comply with Federal, State, County and Municipal ordinances in this respect.

Contractor is aware that there are retail operations below and residential buildings near by.

E. General: Execute work in such a manner as to avoid hazard to persons and property.

Protect existing structural members to remain in place from damage during demolition work, provide competent supervisor to ensure that demolition at these points is not overdone so as to weaken the structural integrity of the members.

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

F.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Carefully remove existing items indicated to be removed and reinstalled, or turned over to the Owner, so as to prevent damage. Store items at location directed by the Owner.

1. Items which have to be dismantled, shall have each piece identified and a drawing prepared by the Contractor showing reassembly of the components.

3.4 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. Remove from building site debris, rubbish, and other materials resulting from demolition operations. Transport and legally dispose off site.

1. Burning of removed materials is not permitted on project site.

3.5 CLEANUP AND REPAIR

A. General: Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean.

1. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations.

Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by selective demolition work.

END OF SECTION 024119

SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

SECTION 033303 - STAINED CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

1.2

A. Extent of stained concrete work is indicated on drawings and scheduled.

QUALITY ASSURANCE:

1.3

A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with not less than four years of successful experience in the application of concrete stains similar to requirements for this project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain products from same source throughout Project.

MOCK-UP:

A. Field-Constructed Mock-Up: Prior to installation of stained concrete, install mock-up of stained concrete. Build mock-ups to comply with the following requirements, using same materials and construction as indicated for final unit of Work.

B.

C.

Locate 10 foot square mock-ups in location as directed by Architect.

Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected.

D.

E.

F.

Demonstrate quality of workmanship that will be produced in final unit of Work.

Obtain Architect's acceptance of mock-ups before start of final Work.

Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed unit of Work. Upon completion and acceptance of stained concrete work, remove mock-ups.

SUBMITTALS: 1.4

2.1

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, installation instructions, and general recommendations for concrete stain/sealer.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packaging with labels intact.

B. Store in clean, dry and protected location, according to manufacturer's requirements.

1.6 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Materials shall not be applied to damp substrates.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

CONCRETE COLOR STAIN SYSTEM:

A. Stain: Chemically reactive penetrating water based dye designed for permanently color concrete floors.

STAINED CONCRETE 033303 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. Product: Butterfield Color, Aurora, IL,(1-800-282-3388)

“Perma-Cast® Sierra

Stain” or approved equal by L.M. Scofield Co., Los Angles, CA.

2. Color:

Match “Sierra Stain BAS-22 Taupe”.

B.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION FOR STAINING:

A. Allow concrete to cure minimum 21 days before staining.

A. Clean substrate of substances which might interfere with penetration of concrete stain/sealer.

B.

Sealer System: Provide

“Clear Guard Cure And Seal” VOC compliant, non-yellowing, matte finished sealer by Butterfield Color, or approved equal by L.M. Scofield Co., Los

Angles, CA.

Remove dirt, dust, rust stains, curing and sealing compounds, temporary construction markings, chalk lines, and other contaminates that will interfere with the proper and effective application of the satin and sealer system and that will affect overall appearance of the completed work. Use methods and procedures that will open the surfaces of the concrete allowing for better stain penetration. Do not use acid cleaners to clean substrates before staining.

C.

D.

All patching work shall be installed prior to application of the stain and sealer system.

Protect adjoining work from spillage, over-spray, run-off, tracking of concrete stain and sealer. Cover adjoining and nearby surfaces and other finished surfaces where there is possibility of concrete stain and sealer being deposited on surfaces.

E. For hard troweled surfaces, open surface of substrates by grinding as specified herein.

Test grinding in an unobtrusive location to assure that sand and aggregate are not exposed by excessive grinding.

3.2

F. Test substrates by spotting with water. If water beads, or does not penetrate surface, continue preparing substrates.

G. Rinse substrates until rinse water is clean. Collect cleaning residue by wet vacuuming or squeegee to drains.

H.

I.

J.

Allow substrates to dry thoroughly prior to application of stains.

Divide substrates into small areas by natural stopping points, such as walls and joint lines.

Scoring: At junctures of stained concrete with non-stained concrete surfaces, score concrete surfaces before staining with diamond blades to a depth of 1/8-inch (3.2 mm).

Rinse until rinse water is clean.

STAIN INSTALLATION:

A. Start installation of floor staining grinding and sealer work only in the presence and with the advice of the manufacture's technical representative.

B. Apply concrete stain in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply stain in the number of coats as required to achieve the desired color. Maintain a wet edge, working newly applied stain into edges of adjacent wet edges of previously treated

STAINED CONCRETE 033303 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

3.3

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

surfaces. Maintain consistent saturation throughout application. Do not splash, drip, or puddle stain on substrates to prevent darker effects. Scrub each coat of stain into the concrete with uncolored, acid-resistant nylon bristle brushes of medium stiffness. Do not allow stain to puddle or drip onto the floor. After the final application of stain has remained on the surface for a minimum of 4 hours, all unreacted stain residue shall be neutralized and then removed completely prior to sealing. A solution of baking soda

(sodium bicarbonate) and water, using 1 pound baking soda per 5 gallons of water, can be used to neutralize the residual stain acid. The solution shall be applied until it stops fizzing. After neutralization, the surface should be rinsed thoroughly with clean water to remove soluble salts. Collect by wet-vacuuming or absorbing with an inert material.

C. After rinsing is complete, a pH test shall be performed to verify that no residual acid is present. A wet strip of red or neutral litmus paper should be applied to the surface, and if the litmus turns blue, no residual acid is present. If a pH of 7 or higher, indicates no residual acid is present.

D. Apply sealer system in two (2) coats. Sealer shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommended application rates. Allow to dry before recoating.

SEALERS

3.4

A. Apply penetrating sealer to all finished surfaces, in accordance with sealer manufacturer’s written instructions, and as required to produce a slip resistant coefficient of not less than

0.60 flat surfaces, and 0.80 for ramps .

CLEAN-UP:

A. Upon completion of concrete stain and sealer, or at such other times as directed by the

Architect remove surplus and waste materials, debris, rubbish, equipment, and implements from the site, and leave the work in a clean, neat and in an acceptable condition, as approved by the Architect.

3.5 FINAL PROTECTION

A. Final Protection: Provide adequate protection of color hardened and stained concrete to prevent damage and staining of the finish floor during the remainder of construction period.

END OF SECTION 033303

STAINED CONCRETE 033303 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports.

1.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1.

2.

Paint products.

Grout.

B.

C.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

2.2

B.

C.

D.

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

FERROUS METALS

A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent.

Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with

MFMA-4.

METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.3 FASTENERS

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

General: Provide type, sizes, materials and finish as required for the indicated application.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

2.5

B. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

FABRICATION, GENERAL

A.

B.

C.

D.

Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

Use material of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated provide as required to produce strength and durability in finished product for use intended. Work to dimensions shown, using proven details of fabrication and support.

Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges.

Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

2.6

E.

F.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

Remove welding flux immediately.

At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

Form exposed work true to line and level with accurate angles and surfaces and straight sharp edges. Ease exposed edges to a radius of approximately 1/32” unless otherwise shown. Form bent metal corner to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports for applications indicated and as required to complete the Work.

B. The work includes but is limited to supports, framing, bracing and attachment of rough carpentry, millwork and casework, solid surface materials, and low walls, etc.

C. Fabricate units to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and required to receive adjacent other construction retained by framing and supports. Fabricate from structural steel shapes, plates, and steel bars of welded construction using mitered joints for field connection. Cut, drill, and tap units to receive hardware, hangers, and similar items

METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.7 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Primer: Shop prime iron and steel items unless they are to be embedded in sprayed-on or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool

Cleaning”.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hotdip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C.

D.

Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.

Remove welding flux immediately.

At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

END OF SECTION 055000

METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 057000 - DECORATIVE METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1.1

RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, apply to this Section.

1.2

SUMMARY

A. Extent of decorative metal work is indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

1.3

SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each product used in artifacts work, including finishing materials and methods.

B. Shop drawings showing details of components, and attachments to other units of Work. Indicate materials and profiles of member, fitting, joinery, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.

C. Samples: Submit samples of metal showing metal preparation and finish required, prepared on metal of same thickness and alloy of existing artifacts.

1.4

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully, fabricating and finishing of metal work similar to that indicated for this Project and with sufficient production capacity to produce required units without delaying the Work.

B. Installer Qualifications: Arrange for installation of artifacts work specified in this Section by the same firm that fabricated it.

1.5

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store decorative metal work inside a well-ventilated area, and protected from soiling, abrasion and damage.

1.6

PROJECT CONDITIONS

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1

METALS

A. General: Provide metals free from surface blemishes where exposed to view in the finished unit.

Exposed-to-view surfaces exhibiting pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, or other imperfections on finished units are not acceptable.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, stretcher-leveled standard of flatness.

DECORATIVE METAL 057000 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.2

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A. Fasteners: Use fasteners of same basic metal as the fastened metal, unless otherwise indicated. Do not use metals that are corrosive or incompatible with materials joined.

1. Provide concealed fasteners for interconnection of artifacts work components and for their attachment to other work, except where otherwise indicated.

B. Stainless Steel Finish:

1. Remove or blend tool and die marks and stretch lines into finish.

2. Grind and polish surfaces to produce uniform, directional, textured, polished finish indicated, free of cross scratches. Run grain with long dimension of each piece.

3. Finish: No. 4 non-directional satin finish.

4. When polishing is completed, passivate and rinse surfaces. Remove embedded foreign matter and leave surfaces chemically clean.

5. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable temporary protective covering prior to shipment.

2.3

FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Fabricate decorative metal work to required sizes.

B. Provide necessary anchorages to assemble units and to attach to other work.

C. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding. Provide welds behind finished surfaces without distortion or discoloration of exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of all flux, and dress all exposed and contact surfaces. All exposed welds shall be ground and polished to blend with adjacent surfaces.

D. Ease all edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch.

E. Assemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing, welding and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

F. Steel Shelves: Surfaces shall be constructed from 16 gage steel with 1 inch returnedges on front, rear and sides. All joints in tops and counter surfaces shall be welded. All welds shall be ground smooth and polished to match adjacent surfaces. Edges shall be hemmed fo safe handling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing artifacts to in-place construction.

B. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, plumb, level, and true, measured from established lines and levels. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

DECORATIVE METAL 057000 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

C. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.

D. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work yet to be performed at the same location.

1. Retain protective coverings intact and remove simultaneously from similarly finished items to preclude nonuniform oxidation and discoloration.

E. Field Welding: Comply with the applicable AWS specification for procedures of manual shielded metal-arc welding, for appearance and quality of welds made, and for methods used in correcting welding work. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. Grind and polish exposed welded joints smooth and restore finish to match finish of adjacent surfaces.

3.2

PROTECTION

A. Protect finishes on artifacts work from damage during construction period with temporary protective coverings approved by artifacts work fabricator. Remove protective covering at the time of Substantial Completion.

B. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction so that no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit; or provide new units as required.

END OF SECTION 057000

DECORATIVE METAL 057000 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 061000 - CARPENTRY, GENERAL

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

B.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Dimensional lumber.

Plywood backing panels.

Wood blocking and nailers.

Rough hardware.

Related accessories and miscellaneous materials.

Related Items

1.2

1.3

1. Casework/Millwork, Section 064023

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following

1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Lumber: conform to PS20 and be marked with the official grade mark of one of the following agencies. Mark pieces or bundles as required by the applicable agency.

1.4

1.

2.

3.

West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (WCLIB).

Western Wood Products Association (WWPA)

Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (SPIB).

B. Plywood: conform to PS1 and be identified with appropriate grade and trademark of

American Plywood Association (APA). Mark material or bundles with official grade mark of the APA.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Storage and Protection

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Follow the manufacturer's recommendations.

Store lumber and plywood not less than 6 inches above ground on framework or blocking.

Cover with protective waterproof covering, while providing for adequate air circulation or ventilation.

Protect corners of sheet materials from damage while handling.

Store and protect fire-retardant-treated materials following the treatment manufacturers requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lumber: Douglas Fir-Larch, Hem-Fir, Western Hemlock, Southern Pine, or mixed white woods (S-P-F) with nominal and actual dimensions conforming to PS20. Deliver lumber dried to less than 19 percent moisture content, and surfaced 4 sides (S4S) unless expressly indicated otherwise.

CARPENRY, GENERAL 061000 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Blocking And Nailers: Standard Grade No. 2 or better.

2.2 PLYWOOD

A. Plywood Panels

2.3

1.

2.

3.

APA treated plywood, fire retardant, touch-sanded C-D plugged, Group 2.

Adhesive: Exposure 1

Thickness: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise indicated

ACCESSORIES

A. Rough Hardware - General Furnish rough hardware required, including nails, screws, anchor bolts, J-bolts, lag screws, cinch anchors, strap anchors, toggle bolts, shot anchors, and similar items.

2.4

1.

2.

Select rough hardware of proper size and type for use intended and for materials to be fastened. Furnish sufficient hardware to ensure substantial and positive anchorage.

Use hot dip galvanized or aluminum at exterior Work.

FIRE RETARDANT TREATMENT

A. Pressure Impregnated Fire Treatment Bearing Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label with fire hazard classification of 25 or less or FRS classification (Guide BPVV).

1.

2.

3.

4.

Flame spread Not more than 25 with no increase in fire hazard classification when test is extended to 30 minutes in compliance with Uniform Building Code

(UBC) Standard No. 42-1.

Provide for all nailers, blocking, plywood and similar members which are permanently installed within the interior portion of the building.

Identification Mark each piece with performance identification label or mark of

UL. Provide identification mark at intervals required by inspection officials having jurisdiction.

Acceptable manufacturers and processes for typical applications.

B. a. b.

Hickson Corp. Dricon.

Hoover Treated Wood Products, Inc. Pyro-Guard.

Moisture Content for Lumber and Plywood

1.

2.

3.

Materials exposed to view in finished Work Kiln dry to not more than 12 percent moisture content after treatment.

Concealed plywood Dry to not more than 15 percent moisture content after treatment.

Concealed lumber Dry to not more than 19 percent moisture content after treatment.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify Conditions. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

3.2

1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

GENERAL INSTALLATION

A. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations.\

CARPENRY, GENERAL 061000 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

B.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement.

C.

D.

Discard units of material with defects which might impair quality of work, and units which are too small to fabricate work with minimum joints or optimum joint arrangement

Miscellaneous Wood Members

3.3

3.4

1.

2.

3.

Closely fit, accurately set, and rigidly anchor in place.

Butt joints tight in dimensioned lumber.

Provide joints in plywood as recommended by American Plywood Association.

Stagger joints in built-up sections.

INSTALLATION OF NAILERS AND BLOCKING

A.

B.

Provide wherever shown and where required for attachment of other work. Form to shapes as shown and cut as required for true line and level of work to be attached.

Coordinate location with other work involved.

Set carpentry Work accurately to required levels and lines with members plumb, true, and accurately cut and fitted.

C.

D.

E.

Securely attach carpentry Work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as indicated and as required by recognized standards. Comply with manufacturer's installation recommendations.

Attach to substrates as required to support applied loading. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise shown. Build into masonry during installation of masonry work. Where possible, anchor to formwork before concrete placement

Apply 2 brush coats of same preservative used in original treatment to sawed, cut, or drilled surfaces of treated lumber and plywood in AWPA Standard M-4.

PLYWOOD INSTALLATION

A. General. Plywood Installation Install plywood with face grain perpendicular to supports.

Stagger end joints between adjacent panels. Leave 1/8 inch wide space between panel edges and ends. Screw in place, spaced 12 inches on center at each support or 6 inches on center along panel edges and 10 inches on center at intermediates if glue is not used.

END OF SECTION 061000

CARPENRY, GENERAL 061000 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 064023 - CASEWORK AND MILLWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1.

2.

3.

4.

Plastic laminate-faced casework and millwork.

Natural finished wood casework and millwork

Plastic laminated faced work surfaces, tops or countertops

Hardware associated with casework.

1. Solid surface materials, Section 123600

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. The terms "Exposed", Semi-Exposed", and "Concealed" shall have the definitions given in Section 400-G-3 of the AWI Standards.

A.

B.

The casework and tops provided under this Section shall be Premium Grade fabricated, shop-assembled, casework including rough and finish hardware, fillers, trim and related accessories detailed, fabricated, delivered and installed with single source responsibility.

Casework provided under this Section shall be Premium Grade casework, fabricated in an AWI certified shop including base- and wall-cabinets, work surfaces, privacy screens, modesty panels, wall caps, hardware, related items and accessories all under a single source responsibility. Provide casework units in the configurations and with the features indicated.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data. Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including performance, construction and fabrication.

B.

1.

2.

Catalog cuts and detailed specifications of construction and fabrication.

Manufacturer's installation instructions.

Shop Drawings. Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, including specific requirements indicated.

C.

1.

2.

Include section drawings of typical and special casework, work surfaces and accessories.

Indicate locations of plumbing and electrical service field connections.

Component Samples. Two sets of samples for each of the following items as specified

1.

2.

3.

4.

Plastic laminate for color and texture/finish.

Worksurface for color and texture/finish.

Grommets for color.

PVC edging for thickness and color.

5. Hardware.

6. Accessories If requested by Architect.

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK 064023 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A.

B.

C.

D.

Quality Standards: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with specified provisions of the following:

1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards" 8th Addition, 2003.

Caseworm and millwork shall be produced in strict accordance with the Premium Grade requirements of the Quality Standards of the Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI).

The woodwork manufacturer agrees to a detailed review and approval of submittals and completed work for compliance to the Permium Grade standards of the AWI by the

Architect. If the Architect disputes compliance with the Quality Standards, the woodwork company agrees to remedy the problems bound by the decision of an independent mediator (selected by the AWI) and the Architect.

Hardware and Accessories Manufacturers’ Qualifications. Firm/s shall have not less than

5-years’ experience producing the specified products.

Fabricator's Qualifications

E.

B.

C.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Firm with at least 5-years’ experience producing and installing the specified products.

A current, active member, in good standing of AWI, and AWI certified as competent to do work of the scale, complexity and quality specified in this

Section.

Successfully completed at least 5 similar projects; submit list with the names and telephone numbers of knowledgeable client contacts.

Firm shall have the personnel, facilities and resources to produce, deliver and install the specified materials within the Construction Schedule.

If fabricator will not install its work then it shall train and maintain a record of acceptable installers.

Installer’s Qualifications if not fabricator.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Firm with at least 5 years’ experience installing the specified products.

A current, active member, in good standing of AWI.

Acceptable to manufacturer.

Successfully completed at least 5 similar projects within the past year; submit list with the names and telephone numbers of knowledgeable client contacts.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping

1.

2.

3.

Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification.

Wrap or crate architectural millwork items in a manner to prevent damage during shipping, handling and installation.

Label each unit for its intended location. Loss or obscuring of unit identification markings, prior to acceptance of its installation, may be grounds for rejection of the work.

Acceptance at Site. Do not deliver casework to site until spaces in which it will be installed are ready to receive it.

Storage and Protection

1. Store materials in weatherproof, climate controlled enclosure. a. b.

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK

Relative humidity: not less than 25 percent nor more than 55 percent.

Ambient air temperature: not less than 50 degrees F.

064023 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

3.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Stack on framework or blocking, with air space of not less than 6 inches underneath; provide for adequate air circulation or ventilation.

Protect corners of materials from damage or breaking.

A. Environmental Conditioning

1.

2.

Do not install Work until interior concrete, masonry, plastering and other wet operations are complete.

Maintain ambient air temperature and relative humidity of the space/s in which this work will be installed within the ranges indicated for at least 5 days before beginning this work.

3.

4. a. b.

Relative humidity: not less than 25 percent nor more than 55 percent.

Ambient air temperature: not less than 60 degrees F.

Store custom casework items in the space/s in which they will be installed for at least 24-hours prior to installation.

After installation, control temperature and maintain relative humidity between 25- and 55-percent.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

A. Medium density fiberboard, free of formaldehyde resin, having a density of not less than

48 lbs./cu. ft., and complying with ASTM D 1037. All tops, lavatory top aprons, and counter tops shall be hardwood faced exterior grade plywood.

2.2 FINISHED HARWOOD WOOD

A. Natural Finished Wood:

1. Exposed Wood Veneers: Provide wood veneers complying with the requirements established by AWI. a. b.

Species And Cut: Refer to the “Finish Legend” on drawing A901.

Grade: AA.

2. Semi-Exposed Wood Veneers: Provide wood veneers complying with the requirements established by AWI.

3. a. Species And Cut: Same as exposed wood veneers. b. c.

Grade: B.

Description: See grade summary table AWI Quality Standard 200-S-9.

Unexposed Back Veneers: Provide wood veneers complying with the requirements established by AWI. a. b. c.

Species And Cut: Mill option.

Grade: Mill option.

Description: Provide sound veneer with no open defects to provide a balanced panel construction.

4. Solid Hardwood Wood: Same species as face veneers they are used in conjunction with, plain sawn, and complying with the grading requirements specified. Solid wood shall be selected to match color and graining of wood face veneers. a. Grade: Premium, Grade I.

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK 064023 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

5.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Wood (Painted Finish): Dry, sound Poplar with no defects affecting strength and appearance.

A.

B.

C.

High Pressure Decorative Plastic Laminate: NEMA LD-3, of the following grades

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Horizontal grade plastic laminate: NEMA HGS-0.048.

Postforming horizontal grade plastic laminate: NEMA HGP-0.042.

Vertical grade plastic laminate: NEMA VGS-0.028.

Postforming vertical grade plastic laminate: NEMA VGP-0.028

Cabinet Liner grade: NEMA CL20, 0.020 inch nominal thickness.

Colors And Patterns: Refer to the “Finish Legend” on Drawing A901.

Backing Grade Plastic Laminate: NEMA Grade BK50,

1.

2.

Use same thickness as laminate on exposed side; or as required to balance construction. Provide as backing at counters and work surfaces.

Color: black, brown, or undecorated at the fabricator’s option.

Cabinet Liner Grade Plastic Laminate: NEMA Grade CL20, 0.020 inch thick.

D.

1. Color: White at PL-02 and Black at PL-01, PL-03, and Wood Millwork.

Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Edge Banding: manufacturer primed PVC edging.

1. Thicknesses: 3 mm at counter edges, and 1 mm at door and drawer edges.

2. Color: To match specified laminate..

2.2 SPECIAL SHEET MATERIALS

A. Hardboard: 1/4 inch tempered hardboard, smooth both sides, conforming to ANSI

A135.4. Fabricator primed and painted. Color as selected.

2.3 HARDWARE

A. Hinges: totally concealed, spring-activated, self-closing, European type cabinet hinges with vertical, horizontal, and depth adjustment, not less than 165 degree opening.

Number of hinges required per leaf shall be determined by door size and weight. Nickel plated.

B.

C. a. b.

Hafele America Co.

Grass America, Inc.

Door and Drawer Pulls

1. Pulls: Provide as follows: a. Wood Veneer And Plastic Casework: Mockett “DP3A (90). b. Trash Bin Drawers: Mockett “DP3C (90).

Magnetic Catches for Cabinet Doors. Mount catches behind pull wherever possible. a. b.

Stanley Hardware No. 46AL.

Comparable products of other manufacturers.

Latches: Ives, No. 2 elbow catch; for inactive leaf of locked pair of doors. D.

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK 064023 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

E.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Cabinet Locks: 5-pin tumbler rekeyable cabinet locks compatible with Olympus Locks.

1. Finish Dull chrome US26D.

F. a. b.

Cabinet door locks Olympus Lock No. 100DR (Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA

A156.11).

Cabinet drawer locks Olympus Lock No. 200DW (Grade 1 ANSI/BHMA

A156.11).

Sliding cabinet door lock Olympus Lock No. 400SD. c.

Standard Drawer Slides: side mount, ball bearing type with epoxy finish with at least

100-pound load rating.

G. a. Accuride. b. Julius Blum, Inc. d. Comparable models of other manufacturers.

2. Waste/Recycle Drawer Slides: Blum “Tandembox 356M55B7SAF” with no

Servo-Drive.

Grommet: ABS plastic, 1-7/8 inches inside diameter, 2-3/8 inches overall diameter, with cap. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturers full range of standard colors.

H.

I.

J. a. b.

Doug Mockett & Company, Inc. TG Series.

Comparable product of other manufacturer.

Shelf Support Clips: Shelf supports shall be heavy-duty, 2 pin design to prevent the shelf support from rotating.

Silencers: Provide felt or resilient silencers at drawers and doors.

Trash Drawer Signage:

K.

1. General: 2" x 3.5" Smith Graphics "Drop In Nameplate" sign with matte black panted finish and clear acrylic. Neoprene tape on back face insert by Owner.

Angle Brackets And Bent Plate: Fabricated from steel to sizes and shapes indicated.

Prime with rust inhibitive primer after fabrication.

L. Trash Bins: Provide two (2) trash bins per pull out drawer detail 3/A960 similar to

Rubbermaid “2957”, 32 gal. large wastebasket, 1 blue and 1 grey.

M. Fasteners: as determined by fabricator for specific application selecting from the following

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Bolts: coarse thread, not plated, with washers and nuts

Expansion bolts: USM Corp., Parasleeve for masonry and Parabolt of concrete

Nails: bright finish steel for interior

Screws: flat-head, wood, bright finish steel for interior

Contact Adhesives: FS MMM-A-130, either water base or solvent release type

2.4 FABRICATION

A. General: Comply with the most stringent "Premium" requirements of the Architectural

Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards" as a minimum level of quality standard for the fabrication of all work, except where more specific or more stringent requirements are specified herein.

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK 064023 - 5

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

B.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, before shipment to project site to maximum extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

C. Fabricate wood and plastic laminate items to dimensions and profiles shown.

D.

E.

Assemble units in the shop in as large components as practicable to minimize field cutting and jointing; mortise and tenon, or glue and screw joints for maximum strength using precision jigs and clamps to insure square corners and plumb vertical surfaces. All bottoms of cabinets shall be flush for ease of cleaning.

Natural Finished Wood And Plastic Laminate-faced Casework

1. Fabricate casework to conform to program and functional requirements indicated.

2. Type of Construction: “Flush Overlay” construction with concealed hinges.

3.

4.

Fabrication: AWI Section 400A and 400B except shelf supports shall be multiple hole support technique.

Laminate Types by Application a. b.

Exposed horizontal surfaces: HGS-0.048, horizontal, post-forming grade

Other exposed surfaces including the following: VGS--0.028 vertical grade

1)

2)

3)

4)

Exposed faces of cases, doors and drawers.

Exposed faces of fillers.

Exposed interiors of cases.

Exposed wall-hung shelves (both sides), unless indicated to be hardboard.

5. Edging laminate

1)

2)

3)

4)

Shelves behind solid doors.

Semi-exposed interiors of cases.

Concealed sides and backs of cases.

Exposed bottoms of wall cases, regardless of height. a. Edge banding shall be provided on the following: All four sides of drawer fronts and doors, and adjustable shelves; exposed edges of fixed shelving; exposed edges of cabinet, including those behind drawer fronts and swing doors.

1) Edge banding on plastic laminate items shall be accomplished with 3 mm PVC edging, except where indicated as wood.

Cabinet fronts shall be edged with 1mm PVC.

2) Edge banding on natural finished wood items shall be accomplished with the same wood used for face. a. b.

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK

Plastic laminate shall be applied to all exposed surfaces, and to the rear surfaces of doors and drawers. Balance of cabinets, etc. shall be finished with cabinet liner as specified for semi-exposed surfaces.

Balance unexposed surfaces of plastic laminate tops with 0.020" backing sheet.

064023 - 6

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

c.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Surfaces requiring more than one sheet of plastic shall have the plastic prematched to minimize color variation and shall be fabricated from the longest sheet lengths available. Joints shall be neatly and tightly fitted

F. a. b. c.

Veneer Match: Book match and balance equal width pieces of full flitch match veneer across faces of casework/millwork and wood paneling, and adjacent components. All veneers shall have grain running vertically, unless otherwise indicated.

Sequence Match: Provide continuous sequence of veneer between adjoining pieces.

End Matching: All face veneers shall be end matched for uniform grain progression.

8. Tolerances: comply with AWI Section 400B-T quality standards, except as follows. a. b.

Fit of doors and drawers: 400B-T-1, except allowed tolerances shall not vary from unit to unit,

Edge / joint quality: 400B-T-5 except allowed tolerance for removal of color/pattern shall apply to semi-exposed edges and joints, no removal permitted on exposed edges and joints, edges and joints shall be machined flush and machine eased.

Core Type and Thickness: comply with Section 400-G-8, unless indicated otherwise.

1.

2.

Cabinet sides: not less than 3/4 inch thick coreboard

Spreaders or intermediate frames and rails: not less than 3/4 inch thick coreboard

3. Cabinet tops and bottoms: not less than 3/4 inch thick coreboard

4. Shelves a. b. c.

Open cabinets (all widths) and wall-hung shelving: 1 inch thick coreboard

Closed cabinets, spans up to 32 inches: 3/4 inch coreboard

Closed cabinets, spans over 32 inches up to 42 inches: 1 inch thick coreboard

5. Doors a. b.

3/4 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated

1 inch thick for doors over 80 inches high or 30 inches wide

G. a. b. c. d.

Sides and back: not less than 1/2 inch Hardwood

Subfront: not less than 5/8 inch thick MDF

Drawer bottom: not less than 1/4 inch MDF or 3/8 inch particleboard

Under-body stiffeners: not less than 1/2 inch coreboard

Fillers Same construction as specified for cabinets, with matching edge finish. Onepiece at top of wall cabinets for run of cabinets. Set flush with cabinet body (not flush with face of doors). Fillers at ends of wall cabinets to enclose gap at top, face and bottom.

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK 064023 - 7

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

H.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Cutouts Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, equipment, outlet boxes and other fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on-site dimensions. Prime paint seal contact surfaces of cutouts.

I. Cabinet Base System Ladder type, 3/4 inch thick exterior grade plywood, separate from cabinet body. Set back 3/4 inch at finished ends unless indicated otherwise, and 3 inches at toe space.

J. Wood Base: Fabricate base to height required to compensate for depressions in concrete sub-floors and allowing field scribing of base to floor in order to maintain a base height of not less than that indicated

2.5 WORK SURFACES

A. Plastic Laminate Tops: radiused edge; joints of tops to back- and end-of splashes shall be seamless and coved, edges at noses of tops shall be eased to 1/4 inch radius

B.

1. Fabrication: AWI Section 400C. Fabricate tops to minimize joints. Plain butt joints using waterproof adhesive and splines in conjunction with draw bolts, forming hairline seams. Do not locate joints within 24 inches of sink cutouts.

2. Plastic laminate face sheet and exposed edges: HGP-0.042, except where chemical-resistant plastic laminate is indicated; bond to core material with waterproof adhesive.

3. Core material: standard coreboard, except use water-resistant coreboard where sinks occur.

4. Install backer sheet over complete underside of tops, and backs of splashes regardless of size of unsupported area; use laminate required to balance construction.

5. Splashes. Fabricate from same material as tops; 4-inches high, unless indicated otherwise.

6. Edges. Build-up exposed edges of top to 1-1/4 inch thickness, or use solid 1-1/8 inch thick coreboard of specified type, and profile as indicated.

Solid Surface Top: as specified in Section 123600

A.

B.

Quality Standard: Comply with AWI 1500, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

General: The entire finish of natural finished hardwood is work of this section.

1. Factory Finishing: Finish casework and millwork at factory. Contractor shall perform final touch-up, cleaning and polishing after delivery and installation.

C. Preparing for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing of concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of natural wood and veneers, as applicable to each unit of work.

D. Transparent Finish (for natural finished hardwood): Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen.

1.

2.

3.

Grade: Premium.

Finishes: AWI Finish System catalyzed lacquer or conversion varnish.

Effect: Stain and filled matching Architect's control sample for texture, sheen and color.

Stain shall be a dye type stain, pigmented stain shall not permitted.

4. Sheen: Satin-medium rubbed effect.

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK 064023 - 8

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

5.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Visual Tests for Exposed Surfaces: The following items will not be permitted: a. b. c. d. e.

Finish Sanding Scratches.

Orange Peel (Slight depressions in surfaces, similar to skin of and orange).

Runs (Running of wet finish films in rivulets).

Sags (Partial slipping of finish film creating "curtain" effect).

Blistering: (Small, swelled areas like water blisters on human skin). f. Blushing. g. Checking, Crazing (Crowfeet separation or irregular line separation). h. i.

Cracking (Formation like dried mud).

Glue spots, putty spots, or smears. j. Filled finish brad or screw holes. k.

1)

2)

Not permitted on free-standing woodwork.

Not noticeable beyond 36" on installed work.

Field repairs and touch-ups – not noticeable beyond 18".

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify Conditions. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

1.

2.

3.

Verify that rough-openings, built-in anchorage and reinforcing required for proper installation of this Work are correctly sized, installed and located.

Verify electrical and mechanical service locations by taking measurements at the

Site.

Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Take measurements at the Site; fabricate work to fit measured dimensions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install items to comply with manufacturer's instructions and with Section 1700 of AWI

Quality Standards, for the Premium Quality Grade.

B.

C.

D.

Install plumb, level, and without distortions. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. Where casework abuts other finished work, field scribe fillers and tops for uniform tight fit. Gap shall be uniform in dimension, less than 1/16-inch. Seal top and exposed edges of back- and end-splashes to wall.

Anchor casework securely in place with concealed fasteners, into structural support members of wall construction or ceilings. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for support of units.

Provide cutouts for item to be built into or passing through cabinets and work surfaces.

Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners.

1. Seal edge of field installed cutouts as specified for factory installed cutouts under

Factory Finish in Part 2 of this Section.

E.

F.

Install accessory materials following each manufacturer's recommendations.

Attach countertops securely to base units. Spline and glue joints in countertops; provide mechanical clamping of joint. Scribe countertops to walls.

Cut and drill tops, backs, sides or bottoms of cases for service outlets and fixtures. G.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK 064023 - 9

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Adjust doors, drawers, hardware, and other moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly.

B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and accessories. Remove packaging and debris from site.

C.

D.

Touch-up, repair, or remove and replace defective Work as directed by the Architect.

Adjust hardware so that operable parts work smoothly without binding.

END OF SECTION 064023

CASEWORK AND MILLWORK 064023 - 10

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 064200 - WOOD PANELING

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Custom wood veneer paneling.

2. Shop finishing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:

1. Shop Drawings:

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

a. Include dimensioned plans, sections, elevations, and details, including interface with adjacent work. b. Designate wood species and finishes.

2. Samples: Wood paneling using selected Architect approved veneer and edge banding, with approved factory finish, 3 samples, 24" square.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Quality Standards: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with specified provisions of the following:

1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards" 8th Addition, 2003.

B. Fabricator Qualifications:

1. Work shall be executed by a recognized architectural woodworking company who can furnish supporting documentation that the firm has been continuously employed for a minimum of ten

(10) years on projects of similar size and quality to this project, and with adequate engineering, production, and financial capability to produce this job without causing delay.

C. Wood paneling shall be furnished by a single-source manufacturer in order to provide undivided responsibility for all woodwork including fabrication and finishing.

D. Fire-Retardant Treated Products: Bear label of recognized independent testing laboratory indicating flame spread rating of 25 or less, tested to ASTM E84.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver materials until proper protection can be provided, and until needed for installation.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Do not deliver or install paneling until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

WOOD PANELING 064200 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Exposed Face Veneers: Provide wood veneers complying with the requirements established by

AWI.

1.

Species And Cut: Refer to the “Finish Legend” on sheet A901.

B.

C.

1.

2.

2. Grade: AA.

Unexposed Back Veneers: Provide wood veneers complying with the requirements established by AWI.

3.

Species And Cut: Mill option.

Grade: Mill option.

Description: Provide sound veneer with no open defects to provide a balanced panel construction.

Solid Wood Quality: Provide plain sawn (flat cut) solid of same species as face veneers, refer to the Finish Legend. Complying with AWI Premium Grade, "Grade I". Trim and solid wood shall be selected to match color and graining of wood face veneers.

D.

E.

Core: Fire retardant treated medium density fiberboard, free of formaldehyde resins, having a flame spread rating of not more than 25 when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. Each panel shall bear the label of Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.

1. Thickness: As indicated.

2.

3.

Width: As indicated.

Product: a. b.

"PyroBlock", by Panel Resource.

"Medite FR2", Sierra Pine Composite Solutions

1.

2.

Veneer Match: Book match and balance, equal width pieces of veneers, and full flitch match form panel to panel and adjacent components. End match for uniform grain progression. Number panels and other matched wood elements for continuous matched installation sequence.

3.

Sequence Match: Provide continuous sequence of veneer between adjoining pieces.

End Matching: All face veneers shall be end matched for uniform grain progression.

Coordinate the veneer matching of wood paneling with wood doors installed flush within the paneled walls, so as to maintain a uniform grain progression between panels and doors.

4. Backing: Apply backing veneer of a compatible species laminated under hot press method to fire retardant core.

WOOD PANELING 064200 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

F. Miscellaneous Materials:

1.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Fasteners: Provide concealed aluminum panel clip type fasteners of the proper type, and material for application indicated to provide secure, concealed attachment.

2.2 FINISHES

A.

B.

C.

Quality Standard: Comply with AWI 1500, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

General: The entire finish of natural wood and veneers is work of this section.

Factory Finishing: Finish natural wood and veneer work at factory. Contractor shall perform final touch-up, cleaning and polishing after delivery and installation.

D. Preparations for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling and countersunk fasteners, sealing of concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of natural wood and veneers, as applicable to each unit of work.

E. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen, and to match Architect's sample panel.

1.

2.

Grade: Premium.

Finishes: Wood and veneers, AWI Finish System Catalyzed Lacquer or Conversion

Varnish.

3. Effect: Stain and filled matching Architect's control sample for texture, sheen and color.

Stain shall be a dye type stain, pigmented stain shall not permitted.

4.

5.

6.

Stain: As directed by the Architect.

Sheen: Satin-medium rubbed effect, except where otherwise indicated.

Visual Tests for Exposed Surfaces: The following items will not be permitted: f. g. d. e. a. b. c. h. i.

Finish Sanding Scratches.

Orange Peel (Slight depressions in surfaces, similar to skin of and orange).

Runs (Running of wet finish films in rivulets).

Sags (Partial slipping of finish film creating "curtain" effect).

Blistering: (Small, swelled areas like water blisters on human skin).

Blushing.

Checking, Crazing (Crowfeet separation or irregular line separation).

Cracking (Formation like dried mud).

Glue spots, putty spots, or smears.

WOOD PANELING 064200 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

3.2 j. Filled finish brad or screw holes.

1)

2)

Not permitted on free-standing woodwork.

Noticeable beyond 36" on installed work.

3.1 k.

PART 3 EXECUTION

INSTALLATION

A.

Field repairs and touch-ups

–noticeable beyond 18".

General: Comply with the most stringent "Premium" requirements of the Architectural Woodwork

Institute (AWI) "1700 - Installation of Architectural Woodwork (Interior) as a minimum level of quality for installation of all casework and millwork, except where more specific or more stringent requirements are specified herein.

B. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Provide all cut-outs for switches, outlets, security devices, audio/visual devices, light fixtures, and similar devices, as required. Install fire stopping in void space between wood paneling and wall substrate.

C.

D.

Where wood members abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit.

Attach securely in place. Attach panels to drywall back-up, over metal studs, with panel adhesive, and trim head self-drilling, self-tapping screws where covered by moldings or trim.

E. Firestopping: Provide firestopping in void space behind panels and walls as required by local code.

CLEANING FINISHING AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged and defective items wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace items. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B.

C.

Touch-up shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

Protection: Cover completed work with 4-mil polyethylene film protective enclosure, applied in a manner which will allow easy removal and without damage to wood paneling or adjoining work.

Remove cover immediately before time of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION 064200

WOOD PANELING 064200 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 064205 - WOOD FINS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Reclaimed wood fins.

2. Shop finishing.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:

1. Shop Drawings:

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

a. Include dimensioned plans, sections, elevations, and details, including interface with adjacent work. b. Designate wood species and finishes.

2. Samples: Wood paneling using selected Architect approved veneer and edge banding, with approved factory finish, 3 samples, 24" square.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Quality Standards: Except as otherwise shown or specified, comply with specified provisions of the following:

1. Architectural Woodwork Institute (AWI) "Quality Standards" 8th Addition, 2003.

B. Fabricator Qualifications:

1. Work shall be executed by a recognized architectural woodworking company who can furnish supporting documentation that the firm has been continuously employed for a minimum of ten

(10) years on projects of similar size and quality to this project, and with adequate engineering, production, and financial capability to produce this job without causing delay.

C. Wood fins shall be furnished by a single-source manufacturer in order to provide undivided responsibility for all woodwork including fabrication and finishing.

D. Fire-Retardant Treated Products: Bear label of recognized independent testing laboratory indicating flame spread rating of 25 or less, tested to ASTM E84.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Do not deliver materials until proper protection can be provided, and until needed for installation.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Do not deliver or install wood fins until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

WOOD FINS 064205 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 Manufacturer: Provide wood fins and attachment system as manufactured by The Woodshop of Texas,

Texas City, Texas (P 888 950.9663).

2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Exposed Wood Fins: Provide wood complying with the requirements established by AWI.

1. Species

And Cut: Refer to the “Finish Legend”.

C.

2. Grade: AA.

Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Fasteners And Attachment System: Provide concealed aluminum clip type fasteners of the proper type, and material for application indicated to provide secure, concealed attachment.

2.3 FACTORY FINISHING

A.

B.

Quality Standard: Comply with AWI 1500, unless otherwise indicated or specified.

General: The entire finish of natural finished wood is work of this section.

C.

1. Factory Finishing: Finish wood fins at factory. Contractor shall perform final touch-up, cleaning and polishing after delivery and installation.

Preparing for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing of concealed surfaces and similar preparations for finishing of natural wood and veneers, as applicable to each unit of work.

D. Transparent Finish (for natural finished wood): Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Grade: Premium.

Finish System: Manufacturer’s standard.

Sheen: Satin-medium rubbed effect.

Visual Tests for Exposed Surfaces: The following items will not be permitted: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i.

Finish Sanding Scratches.

Orange Peel (Slight depressions in surfaces, similar to skin of and orange).

Runs (Running of wet finish films in rivulets).

Sags (Partial slipping of finish film creating "curtain" effect).

Blistering: (Small, swelled areas like water blisters on human skin).

Blushing.

Checking, Crazing (Crowfeet separation or irregular line separation).

Cracking (Formation like dried mud).

Glue spots, putty spots, or smears.

WOOD FINS 064205 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

3.2 j. Filled finish brad or screw holes.

1) Not permitted on free-standing woodwork.

2) Not noticeable beyond 36" on installed work.

Field repairs and touch-ups

– not noticeable beyond 18". k.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

B.

Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.

Where wood members abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit.

C. Attach securely in place. Attach panels to drywall back-up, over metal studs, with panel adhesive, and trim head self-drilling, self-tapping screws where covered by moldings or trim.

CLEANING FINISHING AND PROTECTION

A. Repair damaged and defective items wherever possible to eliminate defects functionally and visually; where not possible to repair properly, replace items. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.

B.

C.

Touch-up shop applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

Protection: Cover completed work with 4-mil polyethylene film protective enclosure, applied in a manner which will allow easy removal and without damage to wood paneling or adjoining work.

Remove cover immediately before time of final acceptance.

END OF SECTION 064205

WOOD FINS 064205 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - PRODUCTS

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.2

1. Mineral wool blanket insulation.

B. Batt and sound attenuation insulation used in conjunction with drywall assemblies is specified in a Division 9 section.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Product test reports.

C. Research/evaluation reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MINERAL WOOL BLANKET INSULATION

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Thermalfiber.

2. Roxul.

3. Fibrex Insuloation, Inc..

B. Unfaced, Mineral wool Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing

ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

“R” Value: Not less than 13.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

3.2

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION

A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.

B. Mineral-Wool Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements:

1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.

2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members.

3. Maintain 3-inch (76-mm) clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected from contact with insulation.

4. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches (2438 mm), support unfaced blankets mechanically.

5. Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation. a. Exterior Walls: Set units with facing placed toward exterior of construction.

C. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials:

1. Loose-Fill Insulation: Compact to approximately 40 percent of normal maximum volume equaling a density of approximately 2.5 lb/cu. ft. (40 kg/cu. m).

2. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 072100

THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 078413 - FIRE STOPPING

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.2

1.

2.

3.

4.

SUBMITTALS

Sealing pipe, duct and conduit penetration through floors to stop fire or smoke infiltration between floors.

Sealing pipe, duct and conduit penetration through rated and smoke partitions.

Sealing rated and smoke partitions at tops where partitions join structure or other rated construction with safing insulation and fire resistant sealant.

Sealing expansion joints and control joints in rated walls and partitions

A.

B.

Submit manufacturer's printed product data indicating product characteristics, performance and limiting criteria. Include appropriate UL design numbers and cut sheets.

Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1.3

C.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistancerated assembly.

Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Materials: Fire stop insulation and sealing materials shall conform to both flame (F) and temperature (T) ratings as tested by nationally accepted testing agencies in accordance with ASTM E 814 or UL 1479 for penetrations and ASTM E1966 and E2307 for joints, and fire tests. Provide a firestop system with a “F” Rating as determined by UL 1479 or

ASTM E-814 which is equal to the time rating of construction being penetrated

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS

A. One-Part Fire-Stopping Sealant: To be used for sealing openings around cables, conduit, pipes and similar penetrations through walls and partitions, including joints:

FIRE STOPPING

1.

2.

3.

Bio Fireshield Biotherm Firestop Sealant; Bio Fireshield, Inc.

3M Fire Barrier Caulk CP-25; Electrical Products Div/3M

FS-One Firestop Sealant, CP606, CP 601, and CP604; Hilti

078413 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

CLK Firestop Caulk; Nelson Electric

SpecSeal Sealant or Pensil depending upon location; Specified Technololgies

Metacaulk 835 or Rectorseal 1000 depending upon location; Rectorseal

Fyre-Sil; Tremco

305SL or 344GG depending upon location; Instant Firestop

B. Latex Spray Compound: Flexible, sprayable, water-based coating that forms a flexible seal capable of controlling the transmission of smoke, other gasses and water during exposure to fire. The following products or approved equal:

C.

1.

2.

3M Specified Construction Products; Fire Barrier Spray

Hilti, Inc.; CFS-SP Fire Joint Spray or CP 672 Fast Cure Firestop Joint Spray

Mineral Wool Safing Insulation: "Thermafiber Fire Safing Insulation" by Thermafiber, or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

B.

Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Install firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C.

D.

Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1.

2.

3.

Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

END OF SECTION 078413

FIRE STOPPING 078413 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 079000

– JOINT SEALANT

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.2

1.3

1.

2.

Joints between backsplashes and adjoining wall construction.

All caulking and sealant work not specifically mentioned in other sections, but required to provide a neat appearing construction.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at [Project site] <Insert location>.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Single-Component Latex Sealant (Interior Sealant and Caulking for Non-Moving Joints):

Provide manufacturer's standard, one-part, non-sag, mildew resistant, paintable acrylicemulsion latex; complying with ASTM C834 that accommodates joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent.

B.

C.

1. Products: a. b.

AC-20; Pecora Corp.

Tremco Acrylic Latex 834; Tremco, Inc.

Single-Component Polyurethane Sealant (Interior Sealant and Caulking for Moving

Joints): Provide manufacturer's standard, non-modified, one-part polyurethane based, air-curing, sealant compound; complying with either ASTM C920 Type S, Class 125,.

1. Products: a. b. c. d.

Dynatrol; Pecora Corp.

Vulkem 921; Mameco International

Sikaflex-1a; Sika

Dymonic; Tremco

Single-Component Silicone Sealant: Provide one of the following for caulking between backsplaches and adjacent walls:

1. Product: a. b.

Silpruf; General Electric

790; Dow

JOINT SEALANT 079000 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

D.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Miscellaneous Materials: Provide primer/sealers, bond breaker tape and backer rod as recommended by the respective caulking and sealant manufacturer's for use with their product and substrates to which they

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2

B.

C.

1.

2.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

C.

D.

1.

2.

3.

Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.

Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.

Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials.

Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

E.

1.

2.

3.

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.

Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.

Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.

JOINT SEALANT 079000 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

3.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.

Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

END OF SECTION 079000

JOINT SEALANT 079000 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 081216

– INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes interior aluminum frames for doors and glazing installed in gypsum board partitions, except where indicated or scheduled as steel doors and frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For interior aluminum frames. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C.

D.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

“Solution II” interior aluminum frames by RACO Interior Products, Inc. or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Wilson, Partitions, Stamford, CT..

2.2

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 12 inches long in size.

Schedule: For interior aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

Coordinate with door hardware schedule and glazing.

COMPONENTS

A. Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finish requirements, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

B.

C.

D.

Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers.

Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated.

Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch (1.6 mm) thick, with removable snapin trim glazing stops and door stops without exposed fasteners.

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 081216 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible with frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.

B.

C.

Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals.

Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate glazing thickness indicated.

2.4

D.

E.

Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08800 "Glazing."

Hardware: Comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware".

FABRICATION

A.

B.

C.

Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at butted or mitered connections.

Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door

Hardware Schedule and templates furnished by the hardware suplier.

1. Locate hardware as required by fire-rated label for assembly.

Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame.

2.5

1. Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors.

Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners. D.

ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

C.

D.

Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates.

Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 120 inches long must be one piece.

Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frame manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 081216 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

E.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Touch up marred frame surfaces[ so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches

(1220 mm)]. Remove and replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

END OF SECTION 081216

INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES 081216 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

B.

1.

2.

3.

Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces for natural finish, and MDO faces for painted finish doors were indicated or scheduled.

Shop priming for painted doors and Factory finishing natural finish flush wood doors.

Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

Related Requirements:

1.2

1.

SUBMITTALS

Section 088000 "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors.

A.

B.

Product Data: For each type of door. Include factory-finishing specifications.

Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

C.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Dimensions and locations of blocking.

Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.

Dimensions and locations of cutouts.

Undercuts.

Requirements for veneer matching.

Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.

Samples: For factory-finished doors.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard:

B.

1.

2.

WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors.

AWI Quality Standard: "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards" of the

Architectural Woodwork Institute for grade of door, core, construction, finish, and other requirements.

Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain doors from one source and by a single manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.

Eggers Industries.

Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.

Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.

VT Industries, Inc.

2.2 FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL

2.3

A.

B.

Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply WDMA I.S.1-A,

"Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

Particleboard-Core Doors:

1.

2.

Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1 or Grade LD-2, made with binder containing no urea-formaldehyde.

Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

VENEER-FACED DOORS FOR TRANSPARENT FINISH

2.4

2.5

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces.

Species: WD-1 and WD-

Cut: Match existing.

2 as indicated in the Finish Legend “ on sheet A902.

Match between Veneer Leaves: Book match.

Assembly of Veneer Leaves on Door Faces Balance match.

Pair and Set Match: Provide for doors hung in same opening.

Core: Particleboard.

Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering.

DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Interior Solid-Core Doors:

1.

2.

3.

4.

Grade: Premium.

Faces: MDO.

Core: Particleboard.

Construction: Five. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed before veneering.

FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

B.

C.

1. Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.

Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.

1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

3.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."

Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.

2.6 SHOP PRIMING

A. Doors for Opaque Finish: Shop prime faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises with one coat of wood primer.

2.7 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing.

B.

C.

1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

Factory finish doors that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

Use only paints and coatings that comply with the testing and product requirements of the

California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile

Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

Transparent Finish: D.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Grade: Premium.

Finish: AWI's, "Architectural Woodwork Standards" catalyzed polyurethane.

Staining: Match existing as approved by the Architect.

Effect: Filled finish.

Sheen: Satin.

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware.

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.

1.

2.

Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.

Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C.

D.

Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

END OF SECTION 081416

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 084126

– FLUSH TEMPERED GLASS DOORS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.

2.

Interior swinging all-glass entrance doors.

All-glass sidelights and transoms.

1.2

1.3

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

SUBMITTALS

1.4

A.

B.

Product Data: For each type of product.

Shop Drawings: For all-glass entrances and storefronts.

1.

2.

3.

Include plans, elevations, and sections.

Include details of fittings and glazing, including isometric drawings of rail fittings.

Door hardware locations, mounting heights, and installation requirements.

Samples: For each type of exposed finish indicated. C.

D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.

E. Maintenance data.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of all-glass systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements provide products by one of the following:

FLUSH TEMPERED GLASS DOORS 084126 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.

2.

3.

Blumcraft of Pittsburgh; C.R. Laurence Co, Inc.

Oldcastle Building Envelope.

Virginia Glass Products Corporation.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

2.2 METAL COMPONENTS

A. Fitting Configuration:

B.

1. Manual-Swinging, All-Glass Entrance Doors and Sidelight: Continuous rail fitting at top and bottom.

Rail Fittings:

1.

2.

Material: Stainless-steel-clad aluminum.

Height:

2.3

2.4

C.

D.

E.

GLASS

Accessory Fittings: Match rail-fitting metal and finish for the following.

Anchors and Fastenings: Concealed.

Materials:

1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), with strength and durability characteristics of not less than Alloy 6063-T5.

2. Stainless-Steel Cladding: ASTM A 666, Type 304. a. Finish: No. 4 satin finish.

A.

3.

4. a. b.

Top Rail: As indicated.

Bottom Rail: As indicated

Profile: As indicated

End Caps: Manufacturer's standard precision-fit end caps for rail fittings.

Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated surfaces), Type I

(transparent), tested for surface and edge compression per ASTM C 1048 and for impact strength per 16 CFR 1201 for Category II materials.

1.

2.

Class 1: Clear monolithic. a. Thickness: 1/2 inch (13 mm). b. Locations: [As indicated] <Insert locations>.

Exposed Edges: Machine ground and flat polished.

ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Heavy-duty entrance door hardware units in sizes, quantities, and types recommended by manufacturer for all-glass entrance systems indicated. For exposed parts, match metal and finish of rail fittings.

FLUSH TEMPERED GLASS DOORS 084126 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

B.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Concealed Floor Closers and Top Pivots: Center hung; BHMA A156.4, Grade 1; including cases, bottom arms, top walking beam pivots, plates, and accessories required for complete installation.

1. Swing: Single acting. a. Positive Dead Stop: Coordinated with hold-open angle if any, or at angle selected.

2.

3.

Hold Open: Automatic, at angle selected.

Opening-Force Requirements: a. Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf (22.2 N) to fully open door.

2.5

C.

D.

E.

Push-Pull Set: As indicated.

Single-Door and Active-Leaf Locksets: Bottom-rail deadbolt.

1. Deadbolt operated by key outside and key inside.

Cylinders: As specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware.

BUTT-GLAZING SEALANTS

A. Single-Component, Nonsag, Non-Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920,

Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Uses NT, G, and A.

FABRICATION 2.6

A. Provide holes and cutouts in glass to receive hardware, fittings, and accessory fittings before tempering glass. Do not cut, drill, or make other alterations to glass after tempering.

1. Fully temper glass using horizontal (roller-hearth) process, and fabricate so that when glass is installed, roll-wave distortion is parallel with bottom edge of door or lite.

B. Factory assemble components and factory install hardware and fittings to greatest extent possible.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install all-glass systems and associated components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B.

C.

D.

Set units level, plumb, and true to line, with uniform joints.

Maintain uniform clearances between adjacent components.

Lubricate hardware and other moving parts according to manufacturer's written instructions.

FLUSH TEMPERED GLASS DOORS 084126 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

E.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Set, seal, and grout floor closer cases as required to suit hardware and substrate indicated.

F. Install butt-joint sealants according to manufacturer's instructions and as specified in

Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" to produce complete installation.

END OF SECTION 084126

FLUSH TEMPERED GLASS DOORS 084126 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing and field applied film. Glass shall include, but not necessarily limited to the following:

1. Interior 1/2” tempered glass for floor to ceiling applications, glass used in conjunction with wood fins and genera interior glazing, except at doors/side lights etc.

Interior 3/8” tempered general use (doors/side lights etc.)

Field applied window film.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B.

2.

3.

Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass;

12 inches square.

A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this

Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. General: Glass shall have the edges, not concealed by stops, channels or trim, ground and polished with a light polished seam on both surfaces. On tempered glass, edge polishing shall be completed prior to tempering

A. General:

1.

2.

Clear Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality q3, Class 1.

Heat-Treated Glass (Gl-1 and General Interior Glazing): ASTM C 1048; Type I,

Quality q3, as specified. Provide tempered glass where used in conjunction with doors and sidelights; and for a fixed or operable panel when the glazing meeting the following conditions: a. b. c. d. when an individual pane is greater than 9 square feet and where the bottom edge of glass is less than 18" above finished floor, and when walking surfaces are within 36" of glass plane and when glazing is within 4'-0" of door

GLAZING 088000 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.3 FIELD APPLIED WINDOW FILM

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Film: Refer to “Finish Legend” on Drawing “A901” for type, pattern and manufacturer of field applied window film.

A. Glazing Sealants: Provide glazing sealants and preformed glazing tapes selected for compatibility with surfaces contacted in the installation

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement

(side walking).

Glazing Channels: Extruded aluminum channels. Finish as selected by the Architect.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

GLAZING

Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.

Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

088000 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

H.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

A. General: Apply film in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions for the intended application. Thoroughly clean glass to produce a surface free of dirt, marks, finger prints, smudges, water spots, streaks, etc. and acceptable the film manufacturer.

B.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

B.

Completed work shall be free from foreign substances, air pockets, wrinkles, and scratches.

Wash and polish glass on both faces not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for inspections intended to establish date of substantial completion in each area of project.

Comply with glass product manufacturer's recommendations for final cleaning

END OF SECTION 088000

GLAZING 088000 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.2

1.3

1.

2.

3.

4.

Interior metal studs.

Gypsum board.

Sound attenuation insulation occurring in metal framing and furring.

Suspension systems for gypsum board.

DEFINITIONS

A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board construction not otherwise defined in this Section or other referenced standards.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following:

B.

1.

2.

3.

Manufacturer's installation instructions.

Test data and source for STC ratings for sound rated partitions.

Test data and source for UL, FM or Gypsum Association fire ratings for fire rated partitions.

Quality Control Submittals:

1.

2.

3.

Statement of qualifications for manufacturers and installers.

Statement of compliance for STC requirements and fire-resistance ratings.

Field Quality Control Submittals is specified in Part 3.

1.4 a. Manufacturer's field reports.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the production of specified products.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with 3 years experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated.

C. STC Ratings: STC ratings indicated are design STC ratings and are taken from industry or manufacturer's printed data for specific assemblies.

D.

1.

2.

3.

Comply with the construction as indicated, plus applicable code or manufacturer's recommendations to achieve specified performance.

Design and construct gypsum drywall systems to achieve minimum sound ratings indicated.

Minor deviations in actual field performance may vary within standard industry tolerance but shall in no case be less than minimum STC requirements of governing code.

Fire-resistance Ratings: Where a specific test assembly or hourly rating is given, comply with necessary construction to achieve rating indicated using materials and construction identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined to comply with ASTM E119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

In the case above, architectural details are for general reference only and specific tested assembly takes precedence.

1.5

1.6

E.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification.

B.

Regulatory Requirements: At areas requiring fire rated assemblies or construction, provide fire- resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA

File No's. in GA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual", to design designations in UL "Fire

Resistance Directory" or FM "Specifications Tested Products Guide" or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C.

Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum boards flat to prevent sagging.

Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for application and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 degrees F. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 degrees F. for 48 hours before application and continuously thereafter until drying is complete.

1. Ventilate building spaces to remove water not required for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during dry, hot weather to prevent materials from drying too rapidly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL SUPPORTS

A. Steel Studs and Runners (Tracks) for Non-load Bearing (Axial) Conditions: ASTM C645, with flange edges of studs bent back 90 degrees and doubled over to form not less than

3/16 inch lip (return) and complying with following requirements for minimum thickness of base metal (uncoated) and other characteristics.

1. Stud thickness: Provide gages as required to limit deflection of stud members to

1/240 of the span, based on a load of 5 psf, but in no case less than 25 gauge

(not less than 0.0179 inch), unless otherwise indicated.

B. a. Provide 20 gauge (not less than 0.0329 inch) studs where indicated or required by manufacturer based on free span length and deflection limitations.

2.

3.

Stud depth: As indicated.

Protective coating: ASTM A653, coating designation G40, hot-dip galvanizing.

Metal Supports for Suspended Ceilings and Soffits: Size supports to comply with ASTM

C754, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hanger anchorage devices: Screws, cast-in-place concrete inserts, or other devices appropriate for anchorage to the form of structural framing indicated and whose suitability for use intended has been proven through standard construction practices or certified test data.

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

a.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Size Devices to develop full strength of hanger but not less than 3 times calculated hanger loading, except size direct pullout of concrete inserts for 5 times calculated hanger loading.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Wire for hangers and ties: ASTM A641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

Flat and rod hangers: Mild steel, zinc coated or protected with rust-inhibitive paint.

Angle-type hangers for exterior soffits: Angles with legs not less than 7/8 inch wide, formed from 0.0635 inch thick galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM

A446, Coating Designation G90, with bolted connections and 5/16 inch diameter bolts.

Channels: Cold-rolled steel, 0.05980 inch minimum thickness of base metal

(uncoated), allowable bending stress of 18,000 psi, protected with rust-inhibitive paint or galvanizing complying with ASTM A653 for G60 coating designation, and as follows:

C. a. Carrying channels: 1-1/2 inch deep by 7/16 inch wide flanges, 475 pounds per 1000 feet painted, 508 pounds per 1000 feet galvanized.

Prefabricated Suspended Drywall Ceiling Furring System: Manufacturer's standard prefabricated, fire-rated suspended ceiling system. Complete with main runners, cross tees, and wall angles. Manufacturer's standard paint or galvanized finish.

1. Acceptable manufacturers and product:

2.2

D. a. b. c.

Chicago Metallic Corporation: Fire Front 650 System.

USG Interiors, Inc.: Donn Rigid X Drywall Suspension System.

Comparable systems of other manufacturers.

2. Accessories: Fasteners, wall anchors, and hanger wires as recommended by suspended furring system manufacturer.

Furring Channels: Hat-shaped screwable furring channels, 7/8 inch deep, complying with

ASTM C645 for material, finish and widths of face and fastening flange.

1. 25 gauge (0.0179 inch minimum) thickness of uncoated base metal, unless otherwise indicated.

E. a. Provide 20 gauge (0.0329 inch minimum) where indicated.

2. Protective coating of ASTM A653, coating designation G40, hot-dip galvanizing.

Z-furring Members: Manufacturer's standard screw-type zee-shaped furring members formed from zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet.

1. 25 gauge (0.0179 inch minimum) base (uncoated) metal thickness, unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide 20 gauge (0.0329 inch minimum) where indicated.

2.

3.

Designed for mechanical attachment of insulation boards or blankets to monolithic concrete and masonry walls.

Protective coating of ASTM A653, coating designation G40, hot-dip galvanizing.

GYPSUM BOARD

A. Provide gypsum board of types indicated in maximum lengths available to minimize end to end joints and in 48 inch widths unless indicated otherwise.

B. 5/8 inch Regular Core Gypsum Wallboard: Conforming to ASTM C36. Tapered edges.

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

C.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

5/8 inch Fire Rated Gypsum Wallboard: Conforming to ASTM C36, Type X. Tapered edges.

D. 5/8 inch Water Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: Conforming to ASTM C630. Tapered edges. Provide for tile backer board in non-wet areas.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Joint Compound: Either ready mixed or powder vinyl base, non-asbestos products conforming to ASTM C475.

B.

1. Select specific formulation for specific application, as recommended by compound manufacturer.

Joint Reinforcing Tape:

1. Cross-fibered paper tape with light precreased fold.

C.

2. Polymer coated alkali resistant mesh tape for use with cement boards.

Fasteners: Type, length, and design as recommended by manufacturer.

1. Screws: ASTM C1002.

D.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

2. Nails: ASTM C514.

Sound Attenuation Batts: Unfaced mineral-fiber batt insulation produced by combining mineral fibers of type described below with thermosetting resins to comply with ASTM

C665 for Type I (without membrane facing); of widths to fill completely void formed by framing members and as follows.

1. Mineral fiber type: Fibers manufactured from glass or slag.

Tie Wires: Soft annealed steel wire.

Metal Trim: United States Gypsum Company (USG) or comparable by other gypsum board manufacturer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

External corner bead: Dur-A-Bead, Model No. 103 with 1-1/4 inch flange.

U-shaped casing bead: Model No. 200A.

L-shaped casing bead: Model No. 200B.

Control joint: Model No. 093.

Reveal Trim: Extruded aluminum trim of sizes and shapes indicated, and as manufactured by Pitcon Industries, Riverdale, Maryland, or Gordon, Inc., Bossier

City, LA. All reveal trim shall have factory fabricated mitered intersections.

Perimeter Moldings And Trim: Provide “Compasso” by USG or "Axiom" by

Armstrong, or approved equal, finish color as selected by the Architect.

Acoustical Sealant: Non-skinning, non-drying, nonstaining sealant especially designed for unexposed sound control applications.

1. Acceptable manufacturers and product: a. b. c.

Tremco: Acoustical Sealant.

United States Gypsum Company: Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant.

Protective Treatments, Inc.: No. 808 Acoustical Sealant.

Spot Grout: ASTM C475, setting-type joint compound of type recommended for spot grouting hollow metal door frames, or ASTM C842, plaster.

Fire Rated Partition Identification: use one of the following.

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Prefabricated Sign: Provide a 7-inch by 3-3/4-inch sign, with the words "FIRE

AND SMOKE BARRIER - PROTECT ALL OPENINGS" in white letters on red background; permanent adhesive back for mounting.

2. a. Acceptable manufacturers and product:

1)

2)

Metro Reprographics, Inc.

Comparable signage by other services.

Field Painted Sign: stenciled 2 inch high lettering may be provided in lieu of adhesive applied sign. Use an orange fluorescent spray type paint.

PART

3

- EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion.

3.2

B.

C.

D.

1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Firestopping: Coordinate gypsum board Work with firestopping work at control joints, expansion joints and other penetrations through fire rated walls, smoke barrier walls, fire rated ceilings, and structural floors. Construct openings for firestopping assemblies to sizes indicated in the applicable UL systems. Refer to Section 078413 for Firestopping.

1. Where wall, floor, and ceiling systems must be constructed before penetrating materials are in place, or their exact location and size have not been established, construct openings oversized. After penetrating materials are in place, complete construction of wall or floor system as required for proper installation of firestopping material.

C. Coordinate installation of ceiling suspension system with installation of overhead structural systems to ensure that inserts and other structural anchorage provisions have been installed to receive ceiling hangers in a manner that will develop their full strength and at spacings required to support ceiling.

INSTALLATION OF STEEL FRAMING

A. Steel Framing Installation: Install steel framing to comply with ASTM C754 and with

ASTM C840 requirements that apply to framing installation, unless indicated otherwise.

B. Isolate steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement, at locations indicated below to comply with details indicated.

1. Where partition and wall framing abuts overhead structure.

Do not bridge building expansion joints with steel framing or furring members; independently frame both sides of joints with framing or furring members or as indicated.

Install components for steel stud wall/partition support systems to comply with directions of steel stud manufacturer for applications indicated and with the following:

E.

F.

1. For non-load (axial)-bearing stud systems, comply with ASTM C754, unless indicated otherwise.

Installation Tolerances: Install each steel framing and furring member so that fastening surfaces do not vary more than 1/8 inch from plane of faces of adjacent framing, noncumulative.

Extend partition framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, unless indicated otherwise.

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 5

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

G.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Install steel studs and furring in sizes and at spacings indicated but not less than that required by referenced steel framing installation standard.

1. Space studs at 16 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated.

3.3

H.

I.

J.

2. Install steel studs so that flanges point in the same direction and gypsum base can be installed in the direction opposite to the flange.

Frame Door Openings: Provide rough framing at openings as indicated, consisting of fulllength studs adjacent to jambs, and horizontal headers and sill tracks. Cut horizontal tracks to length and split flanges and bend webs at ends for flange overlap and screw to jamb studs. Install cut-to-length, intermediate studs above and below openings, at same spacing as full length studs. Provide rough framed openings to receive recessed accessories specified under other sections.

1.

2.

Extend vertical jamb studs up to structure above and attach to underside of structure.

Continue framing over frames for doors and openings and frame around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling to provide support for gypsum board.

Frame openings other than door openings to comply with details indicated or if none are indicated, in same manner as required for door openings; and install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

Blocking and Supports: Provide blocking and supports for mounting items occurring on or in partitions whether items are indicated as part of the Work, as "Not In Contract" (N.I.C.), as "By Owner" (B.O.), "Relocate Existing" (RE) or as "By Others".

1.

2.

3.

4.

Door stops and holders: Provide at every door and as required to accommodate stops and holders. Refer to Section 087100 for exact location.

Other wall mounted items including, but not limited to, fixtures, equipment, services, trim, brackets, hardware, shelving, casework, architectural woodwork, cabinets, paneling, and accessories: As required to support gravity and pullout loads.

Material: Fire-retardant treated wood (at least 1-1/2 inch thick) or 18 gauge minimum thickness galvanized steel stud runner track, no t less than 6” high, unless otherwise indicated.

Configuration: Complying with published recommendations of manufacturer or, if not available, of U.S.G. "Gypsum Construction Handbook", unless otherwise indicated.

INSTALLATION OF CEILING AND INTERIOR SOFFIT SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A.

B.

Install ceiling suspension system components of sizes and spacings indicated but not in smaller sizes or greater spacings than those required by referenced installation standards.

Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes or conduit, and keep hangers and braces minimum of 2 inches clear of ducts, pipes and conduits.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Wire hangers: Space wire hangers not over 4 feet on center parallel with and not over 4 feet perpendicular to direction of carrying channels, unless otherwise indicated, and within 6 inches of carrying channel ends.

Install monel hanger wires in areas where corrosive atmospheric conditions will exist.

Carrying channels: Space carrying channels not over 4 feet on center with 4 feet on center hanger spacing.

Furring channels: Space furring channels not over 16 inches on center, unless otherwise indicated. Wire tie or clip furring members to main runners and to other structural supports as indicated.

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 6

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

5.

6.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

At light troffers or openings that interrupt carrying or furring channels, install additional cross reinforcing to restore lateral stability of grillage.

Installation tolerances: Install steel framing components for suspended ceilings so that cross furring members or grid suspension members are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet, as measured both lengthwise on each member and transversely between parallel members.

C. Prefabricated Suspension System: Install system to comply with manufacturer's instructions.

3.4

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Install wall angle on wall perimeter at level above intended ceiling line equal to thickness of gypsum panel used.

Attach hanger wires (12 gauge minimum) to overhead and bend to desired level.

Connect main beams to pre-bent hanger wires, or attach with laser leveling.

Place beams in parallel rows 48 inches on center and support by hanger wires spaced a maximum of 48 inches on center along each row.

Snap-lock cross furring channels in parallel rows perpendicular to main beams.

Space rows 24 inches or 16 inches on center as specified for gypsum panel support. Install row of channels within 6 inches of walls if angles are not fastened to wall for gypsum panel support.

Screw attach gypsum panels to cross furring channel with 1 inch Type S screws at 12 inches on center.

Support gypsum panel butt joints with 2 additional cross furring channels spaced

8 inches on each side of joint.

GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install and finish gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840.

1. Install ceiling boards across framing in manner which minimizes end-butt joints, and which avoids end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger end joints at least 24 inches.

2. a. Stagger not less than 24 inches in alternate courses of board.

Install wall/partition boards in manner which minimizes end-butt joints or avoids them entirely where possible. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs. a. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs.

B.

C.

3. Install exposed gypsum board with face side out. Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch open space between boards. Do not force into place.

Locate either edge or end joints over supports, except in horizontal applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints.

Position boards so that like edges abut, tapered edges against tapered edges and mill-cut or field-cut ends against mill-cut or field-cut ends. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of partitions.

Attach gypsum board to steel studs so leading edge or end of each board is attached to open (unsupported) edge of stud flange first.

1. Attach gypsum board to supplementary framing and blocking provided for additional support at openings and cutouts.

D. Spot grout hollow metal door frames: Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip just before inserting board into frame.

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 7

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

E.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Control and Expansion Joints: Form control joints and expansion joints at locations indicated, with space between edges of boards, prepared to receive trim accessories.

F. Where framing extends to structure above, cover both faces of partition framing with gypsum board in concealed spaces, except in chase walls which are braced internally.

1. Except where concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 square feet area, and may be limited to not less than 75 percent of full coverage.

2. Fit gypsum board around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

G.

H.

I.

J.

K.

3. Where partitions intersect open concrete coffers, cut gypsum board to fit profile of coffers and allow 1/4 to 1/2 inch wide joint for acoustical sealant.

Isolate perimeter of non-load-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments.

Provide 1/4 inch to 1/2 inch space and trim edge with "U" bead edge trim unless otherwise indicated. Seal joints with acoustical sealant.

Construction of recesses to accommodate items built into fire-rated and sound rated walls: Line 5 surfaces of recess with 1 layer of Type X gypsum board, unless otherwise indicated or required by authorities having jurisdiction.

1. If wall are fire rated, construct wall to comply with fire rating construction requirements, including joint treatment.

Space fasteners in gypsum boards to comply with referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations.

Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard as follows.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

On ceilings apply gypsum board prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible.

On partitions/walls apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing), unless otherwise indicated, and provide sheet lengths which will minimize end joints.

On partitions/walls 8'-1" or less in height apply gypsum board horizontally

(perpendicular to framing); use maximum length sheets possible to minimize end joints.

On Z-furring members apply gypsum board vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum boards to supports as follows: a. b.

Fasten with screws.

Fasten to steel framing with adhesive and supplementary screws.

Double-Layer Application: Install gypsum board for base layer and gypsum wallboard for face layer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

On ceilings apply base layer prior to application of base layer on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset joints between layers at least 10 inches. Apply base layers at right angles to supports unless otherwise indicated.

On partitions/walls apply base layer and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 10 inches with base layer joints.

On Z-furring members apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset at least one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.

Double layer over metal framing at lead-laminated gypsum board partitions:

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 8

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

a. b. c.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

First layer (under Work of Section 13090): Wallboard fasteners, size, and spacing as recommended by lead-laminated gypsum board manufacturer as specified under Section 13090.

Second layer (under Work of this Section): Laminating adhesive only, as recommended by adhesive manufacturer. Do not use mechanical fasteners that will penetrate the lead shielding.

Horizontal joints on exposed face layer not permitted.

5.

6.

For double-layer partition systems, construction above acoustical ceilings may be installed with base layer only, unless otherwise indicated.

Double-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply base layer of gypsum board and face layer to base layer as follows:

3.5

L. a. Fasten base layers with screws and face layer with adhesive and supplementary fasteners, unless required by rated assembly to mechanical fasten both layers..

Ceramic Wall Tile Base: Where gypsum wallboard is indicated as the base for thin-set ceramic tile and similar rigid applied wall finishes, install gypsum board as follows:

1. In "dry" areas install gypsum wallboard with tapered edges taped and finished to produce a flat surface.

ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Accessories: Install accessories to comply with manufacturer's recommendations. Sand after application of final joint treatment coat and leave surface smooth and ready for Work by other trades.

1. Treat metal accessories with not less than 2 coats of joint compound in the same manner as joints. Feather joint compound out from 8 to 10 inches on both sides of corners.

2.

3.

Install corner beads at external corners. Use longest practical lengths. Neatly fit and secure corner beads over external corners.

Install metal trim where gypsum board abutts dissimilar materials, unless detailed otherwise, and at other locations indicated.

B.

C.

4. Provide special ceiling corner casing with vinyl fins at interface with concrete ceilings.

Control Joints: Install control joints at the following locations:

1.

2.

Ceiling control joints: Distance between control joints not to exceed 50 feet in either direction. Also locate control joints where ceiling framing or furring changes direction. Maximum permitted area of ceiling without a control joint is

2500 square feet.

Wall control joints: Distance between control joints not to exceed 30 feet. At every door frame on both sides of partition, extend control joints from upper corners of frames to top of wall or partition. Wall or partition height door frames may be considered as a control joint.

Sound (Acoustical) Attenuation Insulation Batts: Install full width of studs to achieve STC ratings indicated. Cut and pack tight without voids around equipment, outlets, and boxes penetrating the gypsum board.

1.

2.

To hold sound attenuation batts in position, staple batts to back side of gypsum board to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

Fit closely around penetrations.

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 9

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

D.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Acoustical Sealant Installation: Install in compliance with manufacturer's instructions in uniform, continuous beads without gaps or air pockets.

3.6

3.7

1.

2.

3.

Install acoustical sealant at floors, ceilings, around outlets, switch boxes, and other openings and elsewhere, according to manufacturer's instructions.

Install at control joints, at penetrations through and at perimeter of walls having sound attenuation insulation and other locations where indicated.

Seal with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant including a bead at both faces of partitions. Comply with ASTM C919 and manufacturer's recommendations for location of metal trim, and close off sound-flanking paths around or through construction, including sealing of partitions above acoustical ceilings.

E. Fire Rated Partition Identification: Install on partitions above suspended ceiling and in concealed spaces. Place one on each 10 linear feet of wall or partition, but not less than

2 in each concealed space. Install additional identification labels as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.

FINISHING OF GYPSUM BOARD

A.

B.

General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of cornerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration.

Mixing and Application: Mix and apply to comply with joint treatment manufacturer's instructions.

1. Prefill open joints and rounded or beveled edges, if any, using joint compound recommended for this purpose by the manufacturer.

C. Finish interior gypsum wallboard with a Level 4 Finish, and where schedule, provide a

Level 5 Finish:

CLEANING

A. Promptly remove misapplied compounds and droppings from finished surfaces and materials.

END OF SECTION 092900

GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 092900 - 10

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 093000

– TILE WORK

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

B.

1.

2.

Interior ceramic, porcelain, and glass tile, and base.

Setting beds.

Products installed, but not specified under this Section:

1.2

1. Sealants within ceramic tile area: Refer to Section 079000.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including performance, construction and fabrication.

B. Samples: Submit 2 sets of samples for color selection and verification for the following.

1.3

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Each tile type of size, color and finish indicated.

Grout colors.

Sealant colors.

Operating and Maintenance Manual, including recommendations for cleaning and maintenance for each type of tile.

Extra Materials for Owners Stock.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with not less than 5 years experiences in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated.

1. Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

B.

C.

Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification.

Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.

2.

Protect from the elements and from damage.

Store at a temperature of not less than 55 degrees F. for 24 hours before installation.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain ambient temperature within range of 55 to 90 degrees F. during and at least 24 hours after installation of tile materials.

1.

2.

3.

Provide adequate ventilation to carry off excess moisture.

Do not apply setting materials to surfaces containing frost.

Do not install tile in areas where temperature of substrate is above 100 degrees

F.

MAINTENANCE

TILE 093000 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Extra Materials: Provide additional quantities, equal to 2 percent of the total square footage for each tile type installed. Round off quantities to the next higher full case.

Provide the following special trim pieces:

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CERAMIC TILES

A. Ceramic, Porcelain And Glass Tile: Refer to the “Finish Legend” on Drawing A901 for types, colors, sizes, and manufacturers.

B. Trim Units: Provide tile trim units to match characteristics of adjoining flat tile and to comply with following requirements:

1.

2.

Size: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable.

Shapes: As follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes:

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.2 a. b. c.

Base: Coved, and non-coved where indicated or scheduled. Provide base of same size as the field tile, unless otherwise indicated or scheduled.

External Corners: Surface bullnose.

Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners, except use coved base and cap angle pieces designed to member with stretcher shapes.

TILE ACCESSORIES

A. Metal Transition Member: Provide stainless steel angle transition members, and "Jolly" extruded aluminum trim at glass tile by Schluter.

SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4.

1. Water emulsion acrylic latex additive: Add at Project site to prepackaged dry mortar mix recommended by latex manufacturer. Setting bed used in conjunction with glass tile shall be white.

GROUTING MATERIALS

A. Floor Grout: Polymer-modified portland cement sanded floor grout consisting of a blended mixture of portland cement, color-fast pigments, and high strength aggregates complying with ANSI A118.6, complete with second generation latex additive.

B.

B.

1. Grout colors: As indicated.

Wall Grout: Unsanded wall grout consisting of a blended mixture of polymer modified, portland cement, color-fast pigments, and high strength aggregates complying with ANSI

A118.6.

1. Grout colors: As indicated.

ACCESSORIES

A. Sealant: Polyurethane based, 2-part elastomeric sealant, complying with FS TT-S-00227,

Class A, Type 1 (self-leveling) unless Type 2 (non-sag) recommended by manufacturer for the application shown.

1. Color: As selected by the Architect.

Joint Primer, Bond Breaker Tape and Backer Rod (for use with sealant): As recommended by the sealant manufacturer for use with his product and substrate to which it is to be applied

TILE 093000 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

C.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Crack Isolation Membrane: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with

ANSI A118.12 for standard performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

3.2

1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION

A. Surface Preparation: Level walls or floors to receive tile using mortar bed or other material recommended by tile manufacture.

B. Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

3.3

3.4

1. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

INSTALLATION

A. Lay out tile so sizes less than 1/2 size do not occur. Staggered joints are not permitted unless otherwise indicated.

B.

C.

Comply with TCA Standard Installation Specifications A108.1 through A108.10 and the

TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation", except as modified herein.

Set individual tiles larger than 8 inches by 8 inches into setting material, taking care to maintain accurate joint alignment and spacing. set tile to obtain 100 percent contact between back of tile and setting material. Scribe and cut tile as necessary around obstructions to produce closely fitted, neat joints of uniform width throughout the installation.

SETTING METHODS

A. TCA Installation Guidelines: TCA "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation"; comply with

TCA installation methods indicated..

B. Install ceramic tile to ,comply with requirements specified below for setting method, and installation method related to type of substrate construction and grout type.

C.

D.

E.

F.

Back Buttering: Obtain 100 percent mortar coverage on floors by complying with applicable special requirements for back buttering of tile in referenced ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards:

Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form a complete covering without interruptions except as otherwise shown. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so that plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

Jointing Pattern: Unless otherwise shown, lay tile in grid pattern. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center

TILE 093000 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise shown.

G.

H.

Crack Control Membrane: Install over entire surface to receive ceramic and porcelain tile in accordance the manufacturer's instructions.

TCA F125A Floor Setting Method: Thin-set with latex-portland cement mortar over crack control membrane.

3.5

I.

1. Setting method location: Where tile occurs on concrete floors where no depressions occur, and a crack control membrane is indicated.

TCA W245 Wall Setting Method at Tile Backer Board: Thin-set with latex portland cement mortar over tile backer board and metal studs.

1. Setting method location: Where tile occurs on walls over tile backer board unless indicated otherwise.

GROUTING

A. Allow tile to set 48 hours before grouting.

B.

C.

Comply with TCA instructions and material manufacturer's recommendations for grouting.

Grout ceramic floor tile in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.6

3.7

1.

2.

3.

Add latex bonding additives in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations.

Wet or dampen tile and/or joints in compliance with tile manufacturer's recommendations.

Tool joints to hard dense surface, free of pin holes, cracks and voids.

Damp or wet cure grout installed on floors for not less than 72 hours. D.

EXPANSION JOINT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA EJ171 for detailing and installation of expansion joints in tile Work, and for detailing, installation and spacing of control joints in tile Work.

1.

2.

3.

Install removable divider strips of the same depths as the finished tile system, including setting bed. Remove strips after grouting and curing operations.

Remove excess compounds promptly as the work progresses. Clean the adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate evidence of excess, without damage to the adjoining surfaces or finishes.

Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of referenced standards and sealant

CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean setting materials and grout from face of tile while materials are workable. Leave tile face clean of foreign matter.

B.

C.

D.

Do not permit traffic or performance of other work in areas where tile is being installed.

Do not walk on or perform work on newly installed tile floors without using kneeling boards or equivalent protection.

Prohibit traffic on installed tile for not less than 72 hours after installation or until tile is firmly set.

END OF SECTION 093000

TILE 093000 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

TILE 093000 - 5

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1.2

1.

2.

Suspension systems.

Acoustical ceiling panels.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following:

B.

1.

2.

3.

Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.

Manufacturer's installation instructions, specifically written for this project.

Certified test reports indicating compliance with performance requirements specified herein.

Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, specific modifications, component connections, anchorage methods, including specific requirements indicated.

1.3

C.

1.

2.

Indicate grid layout and related dimensions, junctions with other work or ceiling finishes and inter-relation of mechanical and electrical items related to ceiling system.

Label ceiling materials and indicate location of lighting fixtures, smoke detectors, grilles and diffusers, speakers, access panels, exit lights, sprinkler heads, tracks and other items attached to or penetrating ceiling construction.

Samples: Submit samples for pattern verification.

1.

2.

12 inch by 12 inch samples of specified wood louvered ceiling panels.

12 inch by 12 inch samples of light lens.

Contract Closeout: Comply with Section 01700. D.

1.

2.

3.

Operating and Maintenance Manual, including cleaning and maintenance instructions.

Extra Materials for Owners Stock.

Material Safety Data Sheets.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

B.

Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products.

Installer's Qualifications: Firm experienced in application or installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, including specific requirements indicated.

C.

1.

2.

3.

Acceptable to or licensed by manufacturer.

Not less than 3 years experience with systems.

Successfully completed not less than 5 comparable scale projects using this system.

Product/Material Qualifications:

1. Test reports: Results of tests made in compliance with ASTM E84 for wood ceiling panels.

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095113 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

B.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification.

Do not deliver acoustical materials until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, and wet Work to be installed by others is completed and dry.

C. Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.5

1.

2.

3.

Store products in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight.

Protect from the elements and from damage.

Store at a temperature of not less than 40 degrees F.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements:

1.6

1.7

1.

2.

Maintain uniform temperatures at between 60 and 85 degrees F.

During and after installation, maintain humidity within 5 percentage points of humidity to which space was designed.

SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING

A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until Work to be performed in plenum space above is completed, tested, and approved.

MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials for Owner's Stock: Prior to Date of Substantial Completion, deliver not less than 3 percent of each type, color, and pattern of material, exclusive of material required to properly complete installation.

1.

2.

Furnish "Extra Materials" from same production run as materials installed.

Package replacement materials with protective covering, identified with appropriate labels.

Deliver extra materials to Owner's storage location as coordinated with Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers for Suspension Systems:

B.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

Chicago Metallic Corporation.

USG Interiors, Inc.; Donn Ceiling Suspension Systems.

National Rolling Mills, Inc.

Acceptable Manufacturers for Ceiling Panels:

2.2

1.

2.

3.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

CertainTeed.

USG.

CEILING SYSTEM

A. Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Refer to the “Finish Legend” on Drawing “A901” for type, size, pattern and manufacturer".

B. Suspension System: Runners and cross runners shall be double thickness web, bulb section design of electro-galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A 366, web height 1-1/2".

Refer to

Finish Legend” on Drawing “A 901” for type and manufacturer".

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095113 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1. Classification: ASTM C 635, Heavy Duty

2. Color: White, low lustre, factory finished.

2.3

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

ACCESSORIES

A. Attachment Devices: Sized for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1,

Direct Hung, unless otherwise indicated. Hanger wires are not permitted

B.

C.

D.

E.

Seismic Stabilizer Bars: Manufacturer's standard perimeter stabilizers designed to accommodate seismic forces.

Seismic Struts: Manufacturer's standard compression struts designed to accommodate seismic forces.

Seismic Clips: Manufacturer's standard seismic clips designed and spaced to secure acoustical panels in place.

Wall Moldings:

F.

1.

2.

Electro-galvanized steel with hemmed edges; painted finish; supplied by the manufacturer of the suspension system.

Provide inside and outside corner caps to match the wall angle; outside cap to have appropriate radius for wall corner condition.

Color: Match adjacent suspension system. 3.

Moldings and Trim: Provide “Compasso” by USG or "Axiom" by Armstrong, or approved equal, finish color as selected by the Architect..

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and or timely completion.

3.2

1. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INSTALLATION

A.

B.

C.

D.

Comply with manufacturer's recommendations to produce finished ceiling true to lines and levels and free from warped, soiled, or damaged suspension system or ceiling panels.

Install ceiling systems in a manner capable of supporting all superimposed loads, with permissible deflection of not more than 1/360 of span and surface deviation of not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet.

Cooperate with mechanical and electrical installers in locating and spacing fixtures, diffusers, and similar items located in ceiling.

Lay out pattern in compliance with reflected ceiling plans. Where not otherwise indicated, lay out in such manner that margins on opposite sides of rooms are equal or greater than

1/2 tile in width.

E. Cooperate with other trades in the spacing of items occurring in ceilings. Fit acoustical materials accurately to all such items.

F.

G.

1.

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS

Provide ceiling grid and tile material to complete installation of mechanical air diffusers.

Where acoustical ceilings of different heights abut, vertical surface at ceiling break shall be acoustical material to match ceiling, unless otherwise indicated.

At cut ceiling panels, provide edge shape to match standard edge condition of panels unless otherwise indicated. Paint cut edges to match uncut surfaces.

095113 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

H.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Install acoustical materials having a directional pattern with the pattern in a single direction as indicated.

3.3 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C636, ASTM E580 and suspension system manufacturer's recommendations.

B. Install suspension system level, true to plane, at indicated elevations and pattern with finished surfaces undamaged.

C.

1. Where indicated or scheduled, use isolation han gers following the manufacturer’s instructions.

Main Runners: Suspend main runners of suspension systems with straps.

D.

E.

F.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Securely attach hanger to structure above. Hang vertically without kinks or bends.

Space hangers along main runners according to manufacturer's recommendations, reinforcing system to adequately support acoustical material, light fixtures and grilles, registers, and other equipment supported by system.

Hanger spacing: Not more than 4 feet on center.

Do not support suspension system from electrical conduit or mechanical ducts, pipes or equipment.

Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members.

Where spans exceed recommended or specified spans, furnish larger main runner channels or additional reinforcing members, hangers, stiffening or bracing to support loads without exceeding specified allowable deflection.

Hanger: Where provisions have not been made in the structure for attachment of hanger, provide special attachment devices which have been certified by test.

1.

2.

Where ductwork or other interferences make it impossible to provide direct-tostructure suspension within the maximum allowable spacing, provide trapeze suspension system to maintain hanger spacing.

Provide additional hangers as required if ceiling fixtures are supported from main runners and the fixtures cause total dead load to exceed the deflection capability of the ceiling suspension system.

Exposed Suspension System: Space main tees in arrangement indicated on reflected ceiling plan, accurately level and tie to hanger wires. Install cross tees in arrangement indicated on reflected ceiling plan, and lock in place on main tees.

G.

1.

2.

3.

Install prefinished metal moldings and preformed corners at area perimeters.

Provide factory finished edge moldings where unfinished edges are exposed in the finished work.

Install cross tees to provide framing at entire perimeter of openings, such as at light fixtures, diffusers, and grilles.

Lateral Bracing: Install lateral force bracing at not more than 12 feet on center in both directions and within 4 feet of each wall, consisting of 4 hangers wires secured to main runner within 2 inches of cross runner intersection and splayed 90 degrees from each other.

1.

2.

Install hanger to not exceed a 45 degree angle between ceiling plane and hanger.

Fasten strut, adequate to resist vertical component induced by bracing hanger, to main runner and attach to structural members supporting roof or floor above.

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095113 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

3.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Lateral force bracing is not required in rooms with a ceiling area of less than 144 square feet where surrounding walls extend and connect directly to building structure above.

3.5 CLEANING

A. After installation is completed, clean surfaces of materials that are soiled.

B.

C.

Remove and reinstall improperly installed material.

Remove damaged or discolored material, or material that cannot be properly cleaned, and install new material.

END OF SECTION 095113

ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 095113 - 5

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 095443

– STRETCHED FABRIC CEILINGS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2

A. Section includes field-fabricated, stretched fabric ceiling surfaces.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For stretched fabric surfaces. Include mounting devices and details, including coordination drawings for penetrations.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.3

D. Maintenance Data: For stretched-fabric systems to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturer's written cleaning, stain-removal, restretching, and reupholstering recommendations

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fabric-wrapped ceilin meeting the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fabric-wrapped panels through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, furnish length equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 yards (9 m).

2. Framing and Related Installation Items: Furnish manufacturer's full-length units equal to

5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 units, including unopened adhesives.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRETCHED CEILING SYSTEM

A. Core Materials: Overall thickness including with the high density overlay shall be 3/4"

”.

STRETCHED FABRIC CEILINGS 095443 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612; Type standard with manufacturer with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. a. Minimum density: 6 lbs./cu. ft.

.

1. Coe Facing:

12 mil thick face sheet of white/translucent glass mat thermally bonded to the base core finish surface

2. Edge Detail: Square, chemically harden.

B. Facing Material Refer to the “Finish Legend” on drawing A901 for types, colors, patterns and manufacturers.

C. Frame Edge Construction: Manufacturers standard extruded plastic of edge profile indicated.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers/System:

“Eurospan Ceiling System by 443 Technology, Inc.

D. Installation Products, General: Concealed on back of system, recommended by stretchedfabric system manufacturer to support weight of system, fabric tension.

E. Adhesives: As recommended by stretched-fabric system manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install stretched-fabric systems in accordance with system manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Provide continuous perimeter frames of profile indicated, designed to be inconspicuous when covered by fabric facing, with smooth edges, and with surface finish that will not telegraph through fabric facing.

B.

2.

3.

4.

Install framing around penetrations.

Tightly fit framing to adjacent construction and securely attach to substrate.

Install core material with full coverage, flush with face of stretched-fabric system frame.

5.

6.

Attach frame and core to substrate with adhesive or fasteners or both to support system and prevent deformation of components.

Install stretched-fabric systems vertical and plumb, unless otherwise indicated; true in plane; and with fabric square to the grain with straight, parallel seams.

Fabric Installation: Apply fabric monolithically in continuous run over area, without joints or reveals, except where panel joints or midspan frames are indicated.

1. Cut fabric from each roll maintaining sequence of drops and matching direction of weave for sequential and uniform installation

STRETCHED FABRIC CEILINGS 095443 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Fabric Sequence: Maintain sequence of fabric drops; match and level fabric pattern and grain.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Fabric Alignment: Install fabric with patterns or directional weaves so pattern or weave aligns with adjacent panels.

Cutting And Sewing Of Fabric : a. b. c. d. e.

Fabrics shall be cut either on the thread or by pattern, whichever is applicable.

Fabrics shall be tabled and cut square in the shop and trimmed to the sizes required.

Fabric panels shall be laid out and sewn together so that the panels are uniform in width within an elevation.

Seams shall be sewn straight and parallel to each other and, in the same elevation, to other edges, jambs, corners, etc..

Seams shall be pressed flat into an open position or frenched, as required.

Core Overlay: Evenly stretch over core face and edges; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, and sags.

Stretch and secure fabric to frame edges and so frame and frame attachment method are concealed by fabric unless otherwise indicated.

Stretch fabric taught and square without puckers, ripples, or distortions.

Acclimatize and restretch if recommended by stretched-fabric system manufacturer. Repair distortions, wrinkles, and sagging.

8.

9.

10.

Finished appearance shall be absolutely flat with finish tight and free from such defects as sags, wrinkles, puckers, or ripples. Repair such defects occurring in the fabric ceilings. Horizontal seams shall not be permitted.

Fabric shall be independent from backing materials. Damaged or dented backing shall not create a visual defect of the completed ceiling system.

Fabric shall be readily removable in case of damage and easily replaced without affecting adjacent surfaces.

3.2

3.3

INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Shall be +/- 1/16 in. (1.6mm) within one foot (304.8mm), up to 1/8 in. over ten feet.

B. Variation of the Panel Joints from the Hairline: Shall be not more than 1/16 in. (1.6mm) within one foot (304.8mm) up to 1/8 in. over ten feet

CLEANING

A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

STRETCHED FABRIC CEILINGS 095443 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

END OF SECTION 095443

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

STRETCHED FABRIC CEILINGS 095443 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.2

1.

2.

Resilient base.

Resilient base and flooring accessories.

SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 013300, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Product Data:

1.

2.

Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including installation instructions.

Submit Product Data on the following items:

1.3

1.4

C. a. b.

Samples:

Resilient base.

Resilient base and flooring accessories.

1.

2.

Base: 3 inch long samples of each product specified, in each height and color selected, for color verification.

Edge Strips: 3 inch long samples of each product specified and each color selected, for color verification.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A.

B.

Temperature: Maintain minimum temperature of 65 degrees F. in spaces scheduled to receive resilient base and accessories for not less than 48 hours before, during, and 48 hours after installation. Store materials in spaces where they will be installed for at least 48 hours before beginning installation. Maintain temperatures at not less than 55 degrees F. in area where work is completed.

Install resilient base and accessories after other finishing work, including painting, have been completed.

MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials for Owner's Stock:

1. Resilient base: Provide one carton, but not less than 100 lineal feet, of resilient base for each type and color used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE

A. Resilient Base: Rubber, ASTM F 1861, Type TS (Rubber, vulcanized thermoset),

Group I, 1/8 inch thick.

1. Style and Location: a. b.

Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet.

Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with hard floor finishes, unless otherwise noted.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Colors: To be selected from manufacturer's full range of standard colors.

3. Section Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

4. Corners: Field form inside and outside corners.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

2.2

1.

2.

Johnsonite

Roppe Rubber Company

ACCESSORIES

A. Resilient Edge Strips:

B.

C.

1.

2.

Material: Homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition, tapered or bullnose edge, color to match flooring, or as selected by the Architect from standard colors available; not less than 1" wide.

Colors:

Refer to the “Finish Legend on sheet A901.

Adhesive: Adhesive recommended by resilient base manufacturer for type of resilient base and substrate involved.

Aluminum transiti on strips shall be similar to Schluter “Scheine” angle with 1/8” profile or approved equal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

3.2

3.3

A. Verify that substrate is smooth and free of cracks, holes, ridges, coatings preventing adhesive bond, and other defects that impair performance or appearance.

PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrate surfaces as recommended by adhesive and resilient base manufacturers.

INSTALLATION

A.

B.

General: Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions.

Resilient Base:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Apply base after wall covering is in place.

Apply base occurring on cabinet work after cabinets are installed.

Install in as long lengths as practicable, using adhesive. Tightly bond base to backing throughout the length of each piece with continuous contact at horizontal and vertical surfaces.

Corners: Extend base around corners and locate joints not less than 3 inches from corners.

Columns:

C. a. b.

Apply base on all sides of free standing columns and column enclosures unless indicated otherwise.

Apply base with contact cement on column sides less than 3'- 0" long.

Resilient Edge Strip: Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where resilient flooring terminates. Butt tightly to resilient flooring and secure with adhesive.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

3.4 CLEANING

A.

B.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Remove excess adhesive or other surface blemishes from resilient base and accessories. Use methods and cleaners recommended by base and accessories manufacturers.

Remove misplaced adhesive from surfaces of adjacent materials.

END OF SECTION 096513

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 096523 - RESILIENT FLOORING

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.

2.

3.

Resilient tile flooring.

Electrostatic resilient tile flooring.

Related accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section 01330, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including the following.

C.

1.

2.

Detailed specification of construction and fabrication.

Manufacturer's installation instructions.

Color Samples: Submit 2 samples for color verification for the following.

1.

2.

Each type of resilient flooring.

Each type of accessory material.

Contract Closeout: D.

1.

2.

Operating and Maintenance Manual indicating cleaning and maintenance instructions.

Extra Materials for Owners Stock.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

B.

Manufacturer's Qualifications: Not less than 5 years experience in the actual production of specified products.

Installer's Qualifications: Firm with not less than 3 years experience in installation of systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project, plus the following.

1. Installer shall be certified in writing by manufacturer as qualified for installing sheet vinyl flooring employing heat-welded seams.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A.

B.

Packing and Shipping: Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification.

Storage and Protection: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

1.

2.

3.

Store products in a dry place out of direct sunlight.

Protect from the elements and from damage.

Unless otherwise directed, store at a temperature of not less than 65 degrees F.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements: Maintain temperature of at least 70 degrees F. in space to receive tile for at least 3 days before installation. Maintain temperature of at least 70 degrees F. after installation.

RESILIENT FLOORING 096523 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.6 MAINTENANCE

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Extra Materials for Owner's Maintenance: Provide not less than 1 percent of resilient flooring and

10 percent of resilient base of the total quantity installed in each type and color.

1. Deliver extra materials to Owner's Project Site storage location as coordinated with

Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPOSITION TILE

A. Resilient Flooring: Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM F 1066, Class 2

(through pattern) and as follows.

Refer to the “Finish Legend” on sheet A901 for type, pattern, color and manufacturer.

B.

1.

2.

Thickness:

0.125”

Size 12

” x 24”.

Electrostatic Resilient Flooring: Vinyl Composition Floor Tile: Products complying with ASTM

F 1066, Class 2 (through pattern) and as follows

. Refer to the “Finish Legend” on sheet A901 for type, pattern, color and manufacturer.

1.

2.

3.

Thickness:

0.125”

Size 12

” x 24”.

Ground installations using supplied 1” wide x 0.004” thick x 18” long copper foil strips.

2.1 ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Underlayment And Patching Compound: Portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by tile manufacturer for applications indicated As recommended by flooring manufacturer for each particular installation.

B. Adhesive: Moisture resistant type as recommended by resilient flooring manufacturer for type of flooring and type of substrate.

1.

2.

3.

Use base manufacturer's recommended adhesive for installation of resilient base.

Use waterproof adhesives where there is a possibility of moisture.

Provide static dissipating adhesive with static dissipating flooring, including copper grounding strips.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verification of Conditions: Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Surfaces shall be smooth and flat with variation not more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, nonaccumulative.

Concrete floors shall be dry (not more than 7 percent moisture content) and not exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonization, or dusting.

Verify that specified environmental requirements have been maintained.

Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection: Close off areas to traffic where Work is in progress until floor installation is complete.

B. Surface Preparation: Prepare substrate surfaces as recommended by adhesive manufacturer and resilient materials manufacturer and ASTM F710.

RESILIENT FLOORING 096523 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1. Remove ridges and bumps from substrate.

2.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with substrate filler. a. Clean floor and apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface.

Prohibit traffic until filler is cured.

3. Concrete floors shall be smooth to prevent irregularities , roughness or other defects from telegraphing through the new flooring system.

C. Store flooring materials in area of installation for not less than 3 days before installation to allow materials to reach same temperature as installation area.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with resilient material manufacturer's and adhesive manufacturer's recommendations.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Install resilient materials using adhesive

Tightly bond to substrate with continuous contact throughout area of each piece.

Scribe flooring to abutting surfaces to produce a tight joint where joint will remain exposed.

Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings.

Terminate resilient flooring where indicated. If not indicated, terminate at centerline of door where floor finish in adjacent room is dissimilar.

Install tile square to room axis, unless otherwise indicated.

Match adjacent tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged.

Install flooring with grain or pattern running in same direction, unless otherwise indicated.

Chemically bond seams using materials recommended by flooring manufacturer.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove excess adhesive or other surface blemishes from resilient flooring and accessories as recommended by manufacturer.

B.

C.

Remove misplaced adhesive from surfaces of adjacent materials in compliance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations.

Prior to Date of Substantial Completion: Clean floor and base surfaces to comply with manufacturer's recommendations.

1. Seal and wax floor surfaces. Verify materials and application methods with Owner's maintenance staff before application.

END OF SECTION

RESILIENT FLOORING 096523 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 096800 - CARPETING

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2

A. Section includes modular carpet tile and broadloom carpeting.

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

1.3

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

SUBMITTALS

A.

B.

Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

Shop Drawings: Show the following:

C.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles.

Type of installation.

Pattern of installation.

Pattern type, location, and direction.

Pile direction.

Seaming locations for broadloom carpeting

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

D.

E.

Sample warranty.

Maintenance data.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering

Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with CRI 104.

FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.

WARRANTY

A. Carpet installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse.

CARPETING 096800 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

3.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent edge raveling, snags, runs, dimensional stability, excess static discharge, loss of tuft bind strength, loss of face fiber, and delamination.

Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CARPET

A. Products: Refer to the “Finish Legend” on drawing “A901” for each type, colors, patterns and manufacturers

2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining, pressure-sensitive type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet tile and is recommended by carpet tile manufacturer for releasable installation.

1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

Adhesives shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.

3.1 INSTALLATION

A.

B.

C.

D.

E.

Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Preparation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and Section 9 “Direct-

Glue-Down Installation, and with carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions.

F.

G.

Install carpet tile using full spread adhesive method, in strict accordance with carpet tile manufacturer's recommendation installation procedures. Adjust as necessary to avoid use of cut widths less than 1/2 tile at room perimeters. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps. Adhesive used for free lay application shall be applied in a grid at intervals as recommended by the carpet manufacturer.

Glue-Down Application:

1.

2.

Fit sections of carpet into each space prior to application of adhesive.

Apply adhesive uniformly to substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Butt carpet edges tightly together to form seams without gaps,

CARPETING 096800 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

apply seam sealer to seams of broadloom carpeting. Roll lightly to eliminate air pockets and ensure uniform bond. Remove adhesive and seam sealer promptly from face of carpet.

H.

I.

J.

Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

K.

L.

M.

Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

Install pattern parallel to walls and borders.

Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile:

N.

1.

2.

3.

Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.

Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.

Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor

Installations."

END OF SECTION 096813

CARPETING 096800 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Vinyl wall covering.

2. Fabric wall covering

3. Graphic wall covering

B. Typographic Requirements: All copy shall be accurately reproduced with square corners and even curves, and symbols uniform, edges straight and true, and all finishes smooth and with no visible imperfections

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples: Full width by 36-inch long section of wall covering from same print run or dye lot to be used for the Work. Show complete pattern repeat. Mark top and face of fabric.

1.3

C. Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied with identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E 84: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WALL COVERINGS

A. General: Provide rolls of each type of wall covering from same print run or dye lot.

2.2 WALL COVERING

A. Vinyl Wall-Covering: Refer to the “Finish Legend” section 090000 for type, color, pattern, and manufacturer.

B. Fabric Wall Covering: Types, colors, patterns, and manufacturer's of wall covering material shall be as indicated in "Finish Legend". Provide manufacturer's standard backing on fabrics which are adhesive applied. All fabrics shall be flame retardant treated by fabric manufacturer.

WALL COVERING 097200 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

C. Graphic wallcovering shall be a U/V curable inkjet printed commercial PVC-free Type II wallcovering, having a minimum weight of not less than 15 oz. per lineal yard, and Class A fire rating per ASTM E84.

1. Manufacturer/Product: Designtex DNA.

2.3

2.

Artwork image shall be selected by the Architect from manufacturer’s full image bank.

ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining] adhesive, for use with specific wall covering and substrate application; as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

B. Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer for intended substrate.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold, mildew, and incompatible primers.

B. Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, and defects.

1. Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.

2. Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.

C. Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.

D. Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not less than 24 hours before installation.

E. Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change roll numbers at partition breaks and corners.

F. Install strips in same order as cut from roll.

G. Install wall covering with no gaps or overlaps, no lifted or curling edges, and no visible shrinkage.

H. Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside corners unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. No horizontal seams are permitted.

I.

J.

Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.

Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without any overlay or spacing between strips.

K. Remove excess adhesive at finished seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.

L. Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similar items.

END OF SECTION 097200

WALL COVERING 097200 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 097713

– STRETCHED FABRIC SURFACES

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

1.2

A. Section includes field-fabricated, stretched fabric tackable surfaces.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For stretched fabric surfaces. Include mounting devices and details, including coordination drawings for penetrations.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

1.3

D. Maintenance Data: For stretched-fabric systems to include in maintenance manuals. Include fabric manufacturer's written cleaning, stain-removal, restretching, and reupholstering recommendations

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fabric-wrapped wall panels meeting the following as determined by testing identical products by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction:

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing per ASTM E 84. a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fabric-wrapped panels through one source from a single manufacturer.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL

A. Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Fabric: For each fabric, color, and pattern installed, furnish length equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 10 yards (9 m).

2. Framing and Related Installation Items: Furnish manufacturer's full-length units equal to

5 percent of amount installed, but no fewer than 5 units, including unopened adhesives.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRETCHED FABRIC SYSTEM

A. Core Materials:

Overall thickness including with the high density overlay shall be 7/8”.

STRETCHED FABRIC SYSTEM 097713 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. Glass-Fiber Board: ASTM C 612; Type standard with manufacturer with maximum flamespread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively. a. Minimum density: 6 lbs./cu. ft.

.

2. Tackable High Density Overlay: 1/8 inch thick, 18 lb. density, smooth surface fiberglass facing. Provide for overlay on all wall panels.

3. Edge Detail: Square, chemically harden.

B. Facing Material Refer to the “Finish Legend” on drawing A901 for types, colors, patterns and manufacturers.

C. Frame Edge Construction: Manufacturers standard extruded plastic of edge profile indicated.

E. Adhesives: As recommended by stretched-fabric system manufacturer and with a VOC content of 70 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

F. Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

1. Acceptable Manufacturers: Snap-Tec International LLC or FabriTrak Systems, Inc., or

Fabric Wall.

D. Installation Products, General: Concealed on back of system, recommended by stretchedfabric system manufacturer to support weight of system, fabric tension.

INSTALLATION

A. General: Install stretched-fabric systems in accordance with system manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Provide continuous perimeter frames of profile indicated, designed to be inconspicuous when covered by fabric facing, with smooth edges, and with surface finish that will not telegraph through fabric facing.

2.

3.

Install framing around penetrations.

Tightly fit framing to adjacent construction and securely attach to substrate.

B.

4.

5.

Install core material with full coverage, flush with face of stretched-fabric system frame.

Attach frame and core to substrate with adhesive or fasteners or both to support system and prevent deformation of components.

6. Install stretched-fabric systems vertical and plumb, unless otherwise indicated; true in plane; and with fabric square to the grain with straight, parallel seams.

Fabric Installation: Apply fabric monolithically in continuous run over area, without joints or reveals, except where panel joints or midspan frames are indicated.

1. Cut fabric from each roll maintaining sequence of drops and matching direction of weave for sequential and uniform installation

STRETCHED FABRIC SYSTEM 097713 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Fabric Sequence: Maintain sequence of fabric drops; match and level fabric pattern and grain.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

Fabric Alignment: Install fabric with patterns or directional weaves so pattern or weave aligns with adjacent panels.

Cutting And Sewing Of Fabric : a. b. c. d. e.

Fabrics shall be cut either on the thread or by pattern, whichever is applicable.

Fabrics shall be tabled and cut square in the shop and trimmed to the sizes required.

Fabric panels shall be laid out and sewn together so that the panels are uniform in width within an elevation.

Seams shall be sewn straight and parallel to each other and, in the same elevation, to other edges, jambs, corners, etc..

Seams shall be pressed flat into an open position or frenched, as required.

Core Overlay: Evenly stretch over core face and edges; free from puckers, ripples, wrinkles, and sags.

Stretch and secure fabric to frame edges and so frame and frame attachment method are concealed by fabric unless otherwise indicated.

Stretch fabric taught and square without puckers, ripples, or distortions.

Acclimatize and restretch if recommended by stretched-fabric system manufacturer. Repair distortions, wrinkles, and sagging.

8.

9.

10.

Finished appearance shall be absolutely flat with finish tight and free from such defects as sags, wrinkles, puckers, or ripples. Repair such defects occurring in the fabric walls. Horizontal seams shall not be permitted.

Fabric shall be independent from backing materials. Damaged or dented backing shall not create a visual defect of the completed wall system.

Fabric shall be readily removable in case of damage and easily replaced without affecting adjacent surfaces.

3.2

3.3

INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb and Level: Shall be +/- 1/16 in. (1.6mm) within one foot (304.8mm), up to 1/8 in. over ten feet.

B. Variation of the Panel Joints from the Hairline: Shall be not more than 1/16 in. (1.6mm) within one foot (304.8mm) up to 1/8 in. over ten feet

CLEANING

A. Clip loose threads; remove pills and extraneous materials.

B. Clean panels on completion of installation to remove dust and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

STRETCHED FABRIC SYSTEM 097713 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

END OF SECTION 097713

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

STRETCHED FABRIC SYSTEM 097713 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 099100 - PAINTING AND FINISHING

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1.2

1.

2.

3.

4.

Surface preparation

Protection of adjoining surfaces and work

Interior painting

Equipment, supplies and related accessories

EXTENTS OF WORK

A. Paint new exposed surfaces, unless the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is to remain natural or is not to be painted.

B.

1.

2.

Clean surface and spot prime damage to finishes of items furnished shop-primed.

Use primer specified for substrate and the scheduled finish and exposure.

If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the

Architect will make selections from colors and finishes specified for other work in the Project.

Paint existing exposed surfaces, to the extent scheduled.

C.

D.

1.

2.

Prepare surface and spot prime patched and damaged finishes of existing surfaces and items; unless topcoat manufacturer requires complete priming. Use primer specified for substrate and the scheduled finish and exposure.

Extend painting of patched or altered area in each direction over the adjoining surface to the nearest break in the surface, joint or corner.

Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment.

Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels.

1. Prefinished items include the following.

2. a. b. c. d. e.

Architectural woodwork and casework.

Acoustical wall panels.

Finished mechanical and electrical equipment.

Light fixtures.

Distribution cabinets.

Concealed surfaces include walls, floors and ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces.

3. a.

PAINTING AND FINISHING a. b. c. d.

Furred areas.

Ceiling plenums.

Pipe chases.

Duct shafts.

Finished metal surfaces include the following.

Anodized aluminum.

099100 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

b. c.

Stainless steel.

Chromium plate.

4.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following.

1.3

1.4

E. a. b. c. d.

Valve and damper operators.

Linkages.

Sensing devices.

Motor and fan shafts.

5. Labels are Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other coderequired labels and manufacturer’s equipment identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

The term "finished areas" as used under the paragraphs on Interior Painting and Finishing

Schedule shall be defined as those areas having either one or any combination of the following:

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Painted walls.

Painted ceilings.

Acoustical ceilings.

Finished floors, including sealed concrete.

Finished walls (other than painted).

DEFINITIONS

A. Paint: means field applied, coatings of varying degrees of opacity or sheen including primers, emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers, fillers, and other materials whether used as prime, intermediate or finish coats.

B. Dry Film Thickness (DFT) is the residual film thickness in mils, after drying, per coat.

Where manufacturer's recommendations require a greater DFT than specified or if no

DFT is specified, follow the manufacturer's recommendations.

SUBMITTALS

A.

Submit for the Architect’s review.

1. Product Data a. Materials List. Submit a list of proposed materials, prepared by the manufacturer’s technical representative, organized in the same order as the Paint Schedules in this Section. Indicate the substrate to be painted, and the components of the proposed system by manufacturer, product name, catalog number and color, include the surface preparation required for each application or special condition, the number of coats and the DFT

1) Include Product Data sheets for each product on the List. Organize sheets in same order as the Materials List.

2.

3.

Color Selection Samples

Record Samples a. b.

Opaque finishes. Submit 8- by 10-inch samples, on suitable substrate, for each color and sheen combination specified.

Clear or semi-transparent wood finishes. Submit samples on the wood species and cut specified, as a complete system with stain if any.

PAINTING AND FINISHING 099100 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

B.

Submit for the Owner’s use / records.

1.5

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1.

2.

3.

4.

Statement of Qualifications from manufacturer.

Statement of Qualifications from applicator.

Certificate of Compliance from manufacturer for regulatory requirements.

Extra materials.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: not less than 5years’ experience producing the specified materials.

B. Applicator's Qualifications

C.

D.

1.

2.

3.

Firm with not less than 3years’ experience applying systems similar in complexity to those required for this Project.

Authorized or acceptable to manufacturer.

Successfully completed not fewer than 5 similar projects; submit list with the names and telephone numbers of knowledgeable client contacts.

Regulatory Requirements. Coatings shall comply with the Environmental Protection

Agency’s 1999 rule, National Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emission Standards for

Architectural Coatings. Submit test reports prepared using the EPA’s Method 24 laboratory procedure.

Field Samples

1.6

1.7

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Provide full-system finish samples; samples shall cover at least 100 sq. ft.

Simulate lighting conditions anticipated in the finished work for review of field sample.

Correct areas, modify method/s of application or adjust finish texture as directed by Architect to meet the specified requirements.

Document materials and methods used to obtain acceptance. Maintain at least one set of these documents at the Site while this work is in progress.

Maintain access to field sample and protect from damage.

E. Product Identification. Label each container with manufacturer's product identification; use the same names as the reviewed product list. Label shall also include color identification, product contents, and instructions for application and for reducing, if applicable.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's product identification.

B. Storage and Protection

1.

2.

3.

4.

Follow the manufacturer's recommendations.

Store in a cool, dry place out of direct sunlight.

Protect from the elements and from damage.

Store at a temperature of not less than 40 degrees F.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Requirements

1. Follow the manufacturer's recommendations for conditions under which paint systems can be applied.

PAINTING AND FINISHING 099100 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Do not begin this work unless the ambient air temperature will remain above 40 degrees F during and for at least and 24 hours after installation. Provide temporary enclosure and heat if needed.

3. Apply water-borne paints when the temperatures of surfaces to be painted and the ambient air are between 50- and 90-degrees-F. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperatures of surfaces to be painted and the ambient air are between 45- and 95-degrees-F.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Protect from damaging heat and from freezing temperatures.

Do not apply paint systems in areas where dust is being generated.

Do not apply paint to damp or wet surfaces.

Do not apply coating until moisture content of surface is within limitations recommended by paint manufacturer; test with a moisture meter. Do not coat wood or plaster containing more than 15-percent moisture.

Do not apply paint to surfaces while exposed to hot sun.

B. Procedural Requirements

1.8

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Designate the paint storage and mixing area as a “No Smoking” area; rigorously enforce the designation.

Maintain, in working order, a 10-pound capacity fire-extinguisher in the paint storage area.

Provide a metal waste container with self-closing lid.

Remove oily rags, empty paint cans and other debris from the Site daily.

Take precautions to prevent fires.

MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials

1.

2.

3.

For each custom color, provide a quantity of extra paints and coatings equal to not less than 2-percent of the quantity required to complete the related work, but not less than one whole unopened gallon.

Extra materials shall be from the same lot or production run as the installed materials.

Deliver extra materials to the Site as directed by the Owner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers

B.

C.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Benjamin Moore and Co. (BM)

Glidden Professional (GP)

Pittsburgh Paint and Glass Industries, Inc. (PPG)

The Sherwin-Williams Co. (SW)

Acceptable Manufacturers for scrub resistant coating:

1.

“Suffmaster Solid Metal”, by Master Coating Technologies’, Inc. distributed by Wolf

Gordon.

Acceptable Manufacturer of Markerboard Coating

1. Wolf Gordon

PAINTING AND FINISHING 099100 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.2 INTERIOR PAINTING

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Ferrous And Galvanized Metal Surfaces: One (1) coat S-W "Pro-Cryl Universal Metal

Primer B66-310" and two (2) coats S-W "0 VOC Acrylic B66-650". Galvanized surfaces shall receive one (1) coat S-W "Pro-Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66-310" prior to finish painting. Spot prime damaged areas of existing ferrous metal surfaces with S-W " Pro-

Cryl Universal Metal Primer B66-310".

B.

C.

D.

Interior of new ducts connecting to exhaust or return grilles, registers, or diffusers shall be given two (2) coats of flat black enamel to a distance of 2 feet from outlet.

Wood (Painted): One (1) S-W "PreRite Primer B28W101", and two (2) coats S-W "0

VOC Acrylic B66-650".

Drywall surfaces not receiving other applied finishes shall be painted. Provide the following system at locations scheduled:

1.

2.

Walls: One (1) coat S-W "One (1) coat S-W "ProMar 200 Zero, Latex Primer

B28W2600", and two (2) coats S-W "ProMar 200 Zero, Latex Eg-Shel B20-2600", except where scheduled as flat (S-W . "ProMar 200 Zero, Latex Flat B30-2600")").

Ceilings: One (1) coat S-W "One (1) coat S-W "ProMar 200 Zero Latex Primer

B28W2600", and two (2) coats S-W "ProMar 200 Zero, Latex Flat B30-2600.

E.

F.

G.

H.

I.

J.

Existing Painted Walls And Ceilings: Spot prime repaired areas, and apply finish systems of the types and number of coats specified for Drywall Surfaces.

All exposed to view interior pipe, conduit, fittings, valves, hangers, supports, fans, fan supports, equipment and uninsulated non-galvanized duct work occurring in finished areas shall have all visible exterior surfaces painted one (1) coat of S-W "Pro-Cryl

Universal Primer" and then one (1) coat of S-W "0 VOC Acrylic B66-650". All exterior surfaces of galvanized and zinc coat duct work shall receive one (1) coat "S-W "Pro-Cryl

Universal Metal Primer B66-310" and two (2) coats S-W "0 VOC Acrylic B66-650" Colors:

As selected by the Architect.

All exposed to view insulated piping, valves, fittings, equipment and duct work shall have all visible exterior surfaces occurring in finished areas painted one (1) coat S-W "PreRite

Primer B28W101" and then apply one (1) coat S-W ""One (1) coat S-W "ProMar 200 Zero

Latex Primer B28W2600", and two (2) coats S-W "ProMar 200 Zero, Latex Eg-Shel B20-

2600". Colors as selected by the Architect.

All exposed to view interior cast iron soil piping occurring in finished areas shall have all visible exterior surfaces painted two (2) coats S-W "PreRite Primer B28W101" and then apply one (1) coat finish to match adjacent surface.

Markerboard Surfacing: Apply Wolf Gordon “Wink” in the number of coats and at mil thickness recommend by t he coating manufacturer.

Café Booth Interior And Exterior Coating: Provide as follows, using the spray application technique recommended by the paint manufacturer:

1.

2.

3.

Primer

– 1 coat of Scuffmaster Primemaster Bonding Primer.

Base Coat - 1 coat of Scuffmaster MC 2000 (at least 2 coats for very dark or bright colors)

Clear Coat - 1 coat Scuffmaster Ultra-Clear Satin

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify Conditions. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

PAINTING AND FINISHING 099100 - 5

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Do not proceed until moisture content of substrate is within coating manufacturer’s limits.

2. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protect surfaces not being painted concurrently, not to be painted, and the finished Work of other trades.

3.3

1.

2.

3.

Remove device plates, escutcheons, and similar removable items before painting and reinstall items after final coat of paint has dried.

Apply masking tape over UL labels and hardware items that cannot be removed, before painting the surface on which they occur.

Remove protective coverings and masking tape when painting of surfaces or items is completed.

PREPARATION OF NEW SURFACES

A. Mildew Removal. Scrub affected surface with approved cleaning/bleaching solution, then rinse with potable water; let dry.

B. Steel and Iron

3.4

C.

D.

1.

2.

3.

Put in proper condition to receive paint. Use only prime paints compatible with finish coats.

Shop primed surfaces: At field welded or abraded spots, remove loose rust, immediately apply prime coat. Clean previously primed surfaces free of oil and grease.

Surfaces not previously shop primed: Remove rust and scale by wire brushing, sandblasting, or other methods. Remove dust, dirt, oil and grease. Clean surfaces using solvent wash. Immediately apply prime coat.

Gypsum Wallboard. Surfaces are taped and sanded under Section 09260. Remove minor subsequent contamination, dust and dirt. Repair minor damage.

Mechanical and Electrical Work

1.

2.

Prepare metal surfaces as specified for "Steel, iron, aluminum, copper as applicable to type of material scheduled to be painted.

Remove dirt, grease and oil from canvas and cotton insulating covering.

PREPARATION OF EXISTING SURFACES

A. Surfaces Scheduled to be repainted or refinished

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Remove loose, blistered, scaled or crazed finish to bare base material surface.

Wash surfaces with T.S.P. and water or other solution as required.

Prevent impaired bond or bleed through by removing any accumulated film of wax, oil grease, smoke or other foreign matter.

After washing, rinse with potable water and allow to thoroughly dry.

On existing high gloss or semi-gloss interior work receiving gloss finishes, wash and rinse as noted above, then wipe with liquid de-glosser or other acceptable preparation material.

In addition to the above cleaning, provide the following work: a. Existing gypsum wallboard: Fill minor isolated defects and damaged areas in previously painted surfaces with vinyl base spackle. Apply texture on minor work repaired under this Section as required to match existing adjacent surfaces. Using specified primer-sealer, prime all bare and newly textured surfaces scheduled to receive paint.

PAINTING AND FINISHING 099100 - 6

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

b.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Existing painted ferrous metal: Sand rough edges of bare areas to featheredge to adjacent sound paint. Remove rust and loose paint to bare metal; solvent wash, then apply prime paint.

B. Primer. When recommended by paint manufacturer for surface being painted, provide primer or undercoat whether or not specified as part of the relevant paint system.

3.5 APPLICATION

A.

B.

C.

D.

Apply paints and coatings at rates recommended by manufacturer. Do not exceed application rate recommended for the surface involved. Use materials without adulteration and only with thinning agents recommended by the manufacturer in the printed instructions.

Apply materials with suitable brushes, rollers, or spraying equipment. Keep brushes, rollers and spraying equipment, clean, free from contaminants and suitable for the finish required.

Comply with the recommendation of the material manufacturer for drying time between succeeding coats.

Sand and dust between each coat to remove defects visible from a distance of 5 feet.

E.

F.

Apply finish coats smooth, free of brush marks, streaks, laps, pile-up of paint, runs, sags, holidays, air bubbles, and excessive roller stipple. Apply additional finish coats to entire surface if undercoats show through and to correct any defect.

Make edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors clean and sharp with no overlapping.

3.6

3.7

3.8

1.

2.

3.

4.

Finish side edges of interior steel doors with same finish as faces.

Finish top, bottom, and side edges of exterior steel doors with same finish as scheduled for exterior face.

Finish exterior steel frames with same finish as scheduled for exterior face of door.

Finish access doors in open position, with edges painted.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspections. The Architect will visually inspect completed paint finishes under not less than 50 foot candles illumination at surface. Surfaces on which brush marks, streaks, laps, pile-up of paint, runs, sags, holidays, air bubbles, or excessive roller stipple are readily apparent from a distance of 5-feet will be rejected.

CLEANING

A. Touch up and restore finishes where damaged. Remove spilled, splashed, or splattered paint from all surfaces without damaging them.

PROTECTION

A. Protect the Work, whether to be painted or not, against damage by painting. Provide means to protect newly painted finishes. Remove masking tape and other protection media and its residue after painting.

END OF SECTION

PAINTING AND FINISHING 099100 - 7

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 102238 - OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Manually operated, omni-directional single acoustical panel partitions.

1.2

2. Gypsum board acoustical enclosure wall between tops of operable walls and structure above

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified independent testing agency for the following acoustic properties according to following test method:

1. Sound Transmission Requirements: Operable panel partition assembly tested in a full-scale opening (14'-0" by 9'-0") for laboratory sound transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413 and rated for an STC plus or minus 1 as follows:

1.4 a. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 51.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: For operable panel partitions.

C.

D.

E.

F.

1.

2.

Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Indicate stacking and operating clearances. Indicate location and installation requirements for hardware and track, blocking, and direction of travel.

Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring. 3.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved.

Sample warranty.

Operation and maintenance data.

OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1022388 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of operable panel partitions that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

2.1 OPERABLE ACOUSTICAL PANELS

A. Operable Acoustical Panels: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

“631” Hufcor Inc. or comparable product by one of the following: a. b. c.

Advanced Equipment Corporation.

Modernfold.

Panelfold Inc.

B.

C.

D.

E.

F.

Panel Operation: Manually operated, single panels.

Dimensions: Fabricate operable acoustical panel partitions to form an assembled system of dimensions indicated and verified by field measurements.

STC: Not less than 51.

Panel Materials:

1.

2.

Steel Frame: Steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness.

Face/Liner Sheets: Tension-leveled steel sheet, manufacturer's standard thickness.

Panel Closure: Manufacturer's standard.

2.2

G. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish.

SEALS

A. General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following:

1.

2.

Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.

Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed.

B. Horizontal Bottom Seals:

OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1022388 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Automatically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less than 2 inches (50 mm) between retracted seal and floor finish.

2.3 PANEL FINISH FACINGS

A. Panel Facing:

Refer the “Finish Legend” on drawing A902 for type, color and pattern of finish and manufacturer.

2.4

B.

C.

Trimless Edges: Fabricate exposed panel edges so finish facing wraps uninterrupted around panel, covering edge and resulting in an installed partition with facing visible on vertical panel edges, without trim, for minimal sightlines at panel-to-panel joints.

Work Surfaces: Provide as indicated on drawings. Full height tackboard fabric facing, minimum 5mm corkboard covered with fabric. Trim shall not require exposed fasteners.

No trim shall be permitted on vertical edges so as to provide uninterrupted work surface.

SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.

1. Style:

Manufacturer’s standard.

B. Carriers: Trolley system shall be two 2-wheeled counter rotating horizontal carriers as required for configuration, type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.

2.5

C. Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum.

ACCESSORIES

A. Storage Pocket Door: Full height at end of partition runs to conceal stacked partition; of same materials, finish, construction, thickness, and acoustical qualities as panels; complete with operating hardware and acoustical seals at soffit, floor, and jambs. Hinges in finish to match other exposed hardware.

1.

2.

Manufacturer's standard method to secure storage pocket door in closed position.

Pocket door finish shall be factory primed for field finishing/painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with ASTM E 557 except as otherwise required by operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions.

OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1022388 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

B.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Install operable panel partitions and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed in area of partition installation.

3.2

C.

D.

B.

Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

Broken, cracked, deformed, or unmatched gasketing or gasketing with gaps at butted ends is not acceptable.

E. Install acoustical barriers above operable wall system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for a complete acoustical barrier and with requirements specified in section

"092900-Gypsum Drywall".

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Extent and Testing Methodology: Arrange for testing the completed operable panel partition installation in successive stages in areas of extent described below. Partitions are to be properly adjusted and fitted to ensure compliance with NIC requirements.

1.

2.

3.

Within each area, independent testing agency shall randomly select an operable panel partition installation and test according to ASTM E 336 for complying NIC.

The NIC rating shall be calculated according to ASTM E 413.

Minimum acceptable NIC for operable wall assembly is 40

If any operable wall does not initially meet the NIC requirements stated above,

Installer shall be responsible for modifying and adjusting wall assembly as required, after which wall shall be retested until compliance is achieved.

Contractor will pay cost of in-place field test for each operable wall. 4.

Repair or replace operable panel partitions within areas where test results indicate partitions do not comply with requirements and retest new partitions.

3.3

3.4

ADJUSTING

A. Adjust to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping.

DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain operable panel partitions.

END OF SECTION 102238

OPERABLE PANEL PARTITIONS 1022388 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

-

SECTION 102239 - OPERABLE GLASS WALLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1

1.2

SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Manually operated, glass wall.

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

1.3

1.4

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Acoustical Performance: Provide operable panel partitions tested by a qualified independent testing agency for the following acoustic properties according to following test method:

1. Sound Transmission Requirements: Operable glass wall assembly tested in a full-scale opening (14'-0" by 9'-0") for laboratory sound transmission loss performance according to ASTM E 90, determined by ASTM E 413 and rated for an STC plus or minus 1 as follows: a. Sound Transmission Class (STC): 44.

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B.

C.

D.

Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed material, finish, covering, or facing indicated, prepared on Samples of size indicated below:

1. Glass: Units

12” square.

2. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard exposed door-operating device.

Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved:

1. Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.

Operation and Maintenance Data: For operation and maintenance.

Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

E.

F.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An employer of workers trained and approved by manufacturer.

OPERABLE GLASS WALL 102239 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

B.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protectively package and sequence panels in order for installation. Clearly mark packages and panels with numbering system used on Shop Drawings. Do not use permanent markings on panels.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of operable panel partition openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.8 WARRANTY

A.

Furnish manufacturer’s 2 year warranty providing coverage against defects in materials and installation.

PART 2 - GENERAL

2.1

2.2

2.3

MANUFACTURER

A. Operable Glass Walls: Partition system, including panels, seals, finish facing, suspension system, operators, and accessories.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide

“GA1” Hufcor Inc.

MATERIALS

A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.

1.

2.

Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209M.

Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221M.

OPERABLE GLASS PANELS

A. Operable Glass Panels:

Panels shall be nominally 3” thick, full perimeter extruded aluminum frame with interlocking corner construction reinforced by means of concealed steel corner brackets. Glazing seals and gaskets shall be snap-on and shaped to suit the glass configuration and thickness, including, top and bottom seals, suspension system, operators, and accessories.

B.

C.

Panel Operation: Manually operated panels.

Glass Panel: Glass faces shall be factory installed sealed double glazed tempered glass units.

1.

2.

Glass and Glazing: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Type I (transparent flat glass), Class 1 (clear) Quality-Q3.

Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system.

OPERABLE GLASS WALL 102239 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

D.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Dimensions: Fabricate operable glass wall to form an assembled system of equal width panels and verified by field measurements.

E. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard as required to operate operable panel partition and accessories; with decorative, protective finish.

F. Finishes:

1. Exposed Metal: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range as follows:

2.4 a. Aluminum: Natural anodized.

SEALS

A. General: Provide seals that produce operable panel partitions complying with performance requirements and the following:

B.

1.

2.

Seals made from materials and in profiles that minimize sound leakage.

Seals fitting tight at contact surfaces and sealing continuously between adjacent panels and between operable panel partition perimeter and adjacent surfaces, when operable panel partition is extended and closed.

Horizontal Bottom Seals:

1. Automatically Operated for Acoustical Panels: Extension and retraction of bottom seal automatically operated by movement of partition, with operating range not less than 1 inch (25 mm) between retracted seal and floor finish.

2.5

2.6

SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tracks: Steel or aluminum mounted directly to overhead structural support, with adjustable steel hanger rods for overhead support, designed for operation, size, and weight of operable panel partition indicated. Provide a continuous system of track sections and accessories to accommodate configuration and layout indicated for partition operation and storage.

1.

Style: Manufacturer’s standard.

B.

C.

Carriers: Trolley system shall be two 2-wheeled counter rotating horizontal carriers as required for configuration, type, size, and weight of partition and for easy operation; with ball-bearing wheels.

Track Intersections, Switches, and Accessories: As required for operation, storage, track configuration, and layout indicated for operable panel partitions, and compatible with partition assembly specified. Fabricate track intersections and switches from steel or aluminum.

ACCESSORIES

A. Passage Doors: Full height doors of same construction as wall panels.

1. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard hinges/pivots, and latch/lock with lever handles.

OPERABLE GLASS WALL 102239 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.7 EXAMINATION

A.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Examine flooring, structural support, and opening, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of operable storefronts.

2.8

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with operable panel partition manufacturer's written installation instructions and approved shop drawings.

B.

C.

Install operable glass walls and accessories after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

Broken, cracked, chipped, deformed, or unmatched panels are not acceptable.

2.9 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust operable storefronts to operate smoothly, without warping or binding. Lubricate hardware, and other moving parts.

B. Adjust doors and storage pocket doors to operate smoothly and easily, without binding or warping. Check and readjust operating hardware. Confirm that latches and locks engage accurately and securely without forcing or binding.

2.10 CLEANING

A. Clean soiled surfaces of operable glass walls to remove dust, loose fibers, fingerprints, adhesives, and other foreign materials according to manufacturer's written instructions.

2.11 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

A. Training of the Owner's operation and maintenance personnel is required in cooperation with the Owner and/or Owner's Representative.

2.12 REPAIR

A. As installation of work under this section proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed to accommodate the installation of work under this section.

B. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.

END OF SECTION 102239

OPERABLE GLASS WALL 102239 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

SECTION 102600 - WALL PROTECTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

A. Extent of corner guards are indicated on drawings and scheduled.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer: Unless otherwise acceptable to the Architect furnish wall protection and accessories by one manufacturer for the entire project.

B. In addition to the requirements of these specifications, comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation and application of wall protection.

1.4

2.1

SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for sheet protection. Include methods of installation for each type of substrate to receive sheet protection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS:

A. Corner Guards: Corner guards shall be extruded from clear polycarbonate material with an impact resistance of 16 ft. lb./inch as tested per ASTM D-256, Notched Izod Test.

Thickness to be nominal 0.10" (2.5mm) for 2" (50.8mm), legs. Provide

“LG-200” by

Construction Specialties, or approved equal. Height: As indicated, where not indicated provide at 4’-0” above finished floor.

B. Fasteners: All fasteners to be non-corrosive and compatible with polycarbonate. All necessary fasteners to be supplied by the manufacturer

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

A. Install sheet protection at the location shown, complying with the manufacturer's instructions.

END OF SECTION 102600

WALL PROTECTION 102600-1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide the following fire extinguishers and cabinets, and related accessories for a complete installation as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.

1. Fire extinguishers.

2. Recessed, trimless, with flush solid door fire extinguisher cabinets

3. Bracket mounted fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1

Specification Sections.

1.3

B. Product data for cabinets include rough-in dimensions, details showing mounting methods, relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction, door hardware, cabinet type and materials, trim style, door construction, panel style, and materials.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain extinguishers and cabinets from one source from a single manufacturer.

2.2

B. Coordination: Verify that cabinets are sized to accommodate type and capacity of extinguishers specified.

C. UL-Listed Products: Fire extinguishers shall be UL listed with UL listing mark for type, rating, and classification of extinguisher.

D. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in

ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Subject to compliance with the requirements indicated and specified, provide fire extinguishers and cabinets by one of the following:

1. J.L. Industries.

2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co.

3. Potter-Roemer.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 104413 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers for each cabinet and other locations indicated, in manufacturer's standard colors and finishes, that comply with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Multipurpose Dry Chemical Type: UL-rated 4-A:60-B:C, 10-lb nominal capacity, in enameled steel container.

2.3 MOUNTING BRACKETS

A. Brackets: Designed to prevent accidentally dislodging extinguisher, of sizes required for type and capacity of extinguisher indicated, in plated finish.

2.4

1. Provide brackets for extinguishers not located in cabinets.

CABINETS

A. Construction: Manufacturer's standard steel box, with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Weld joints and grind smooth. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

B. Fire-Rated Cabinets: UL listed with UL listing mark with fire-resistance rating of wall where it is installed.

C. Cabinet Type: Suitable for containing the following:

1. Fire extinguisher.

D. Recessed Cabinet: Cabinet box semi-recessed in walls to suit style of trim indicated; with onepiece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

E. Trimless with Concealed Flange: Surface of surrounding wall finishes flush with exterior finished surface of cabinet frame and door, without overlapping trim attached to cabinet. Provide recessed flange, of same material as box, attached to box to act as drywall bead.

F. Door Material and Construction: Manufacturer's standard door construction, of material indicated, coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Enameled Steel: Manufacturer's standard finish, hollow steel door construction with tubular stiles and rails.

G. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet, valve cabinets, and valve and extinguisher cabinets with engraved lettering with black backfill in the door face. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location. Identify fire extinguisher in cabinet with FIRE EXTINGUISHER lettering applied to door. Provide lettering to comply with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, color, size, spacing, and location.

1. Application Process: Silk screen.

H. Door Style: Manufacturer's standard design has follows.

1. Solid Panel Stainless Steel Doors: Full flush opaque panel of material indicated.

I. Door Hardware: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge permitting door to open 180 deg.

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 104413 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.5 FINISHES FOR CABINETS, GENERAL

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

2.6

A. Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and designating finishes.

STEEL CABINET FINISHES

A. Surface Preparation: Solvent-clean surfaces complying with SSPS-SP 1 to remove dirt, oil, grease, and other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 5 (white metal blast cleaning) or SSPC-

SP 8 (pickling).

B. Factory-Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer specified below immediately following surface preparation and pretreatment.

1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's or fabricator's standard fast-curing, lead-free, universal primer, selected for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion, for compatibility with substrate and field-applied finish paint system specified for exterior of cabinets, and for capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged exposure.

C. Baked-Enamel Finish (For Cabinet Interior): Immediately after cleaning and pretreatment, apply manufacturer's standard two-coat baked-enamel finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat to surfaces of cabinet interior. Comply with paint manufacturer's instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.

1. Color and Gloss: Manufacturer's standard color and gloss designations. Paint the following: a. Interior of cabinet.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for thickness and framing for cabinets to verify cabinet depth and mounting prior to cabinet installation.

B. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Follow manufacturer's printed instructions for installation.

B. Install in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities.

1. Prepare recesses in walls for cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and style of trim and to comply with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Fasten mounting brackets and cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

END OF SECTION 104413

FIRE EXTINGUISHERS AND CABINETS 104413 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

SECTION 113100

– APPLIANCES AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY:

1.3

A. Extent of appliances and miscellaneous equipment required is indicated on drawings.

SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of appliance and equipment, including data indicating compliance with requirements.

Submit operating and maintenance instructions for each item of appliance and equipment.

1.4 DELIVERY AND STORAGE:

A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers, after spaces to receive them have been fully enclosed.

1.5

2.1

SPECIFIED PRODUCT WARRANTIES:

A. Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of appliance and equipment.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

APPLIANCES AND EQUIPMENT:

A. General:

Refer to the “Equipment And Appliance Schedule” on drawing “A901” for each type of appliance and equipment required.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. A.

B. Built-In Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops and concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed.

3.2

B.

C.

C. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper operation of equipment.

ADJUST AND CLEAN:

A. Testing: Test each item of equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments.

Accessories: Verify that accessory items required have been furnished.

Cleaning: Remove packing material from kitchen equipment items and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation.

APPLIANCES AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 113100 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

END OF SECTION 113100

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

APPLIANCES AND MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT 113100 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 122113 - HORIZONTAL BLINDS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. Horizontal slat louver blinds.

2. Operating hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:

1. Product Data: Describe blind construction and finishes.

2. Samples: 6 inch long slat samples in color selected.

1.3 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Do not install blinds until painting and finishing work is complete.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Design Basis: Contract Documents are based on products by [____].

B. Equivalent products by following manufacturers are acceptable:

1. Hunter Douglas, Inc

2. Levolor Contract.

3. Springs Window Fashions Division, Inc.

2.2 COMPONENTS

A. Louver Slats: Prefinished spring tempered aluminum, horizontal slats with radiused corners, in size matching Building Stanard.

B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene ladders.

C. Head Rail: Prefinished, formed aluminum or steel box, internally fitted for hardware, pulleys, and bearings for blind operation.

D. Cord: Braided nylon or polypropylene.

E. Control Wand: Same as the Building Standard.

F. Support Brackets: Suitable for wall or soffit mounting, formed metal to match head rail, allowing removal of head rail for maintenance without removing bracket.

G. Operation: Same as the Building Standard

2.3 FABRICATION

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS.

ADDENDUM #2

122113-1

OCTOBER 2, 2013

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

A. Fabricate blinds to fit openings with uniform edge clearance of ¼ inch.

B. At openings requiring multiple blind units, provide separate blind assemblies with space of 1/4 inch between assemblies, occurring at window mullion centers.

2.4 FINISHES

A. Slats: Baked enamel, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range].

B. Head Rails and Brackets: Baked enamel, color to be selected from manufacturer's full color range.

C. Ladders and cords: Dyed to closely match slats.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Secure with concealed fasteners.

C. Do not mount blinds to window mullions

D. Place intermediate head supports at maximum 48 inches on center.

E. Installation Tolerances:

1. Maximum gap at window opening perimeter: 1/4 inch.

2. Maximum offset from level: 1/8 inch.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust blinds for proper operation.

END OF SECTION 122113

HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS.

ADDENDUM #2

122113-2

OCTOBER 2, 2013

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 122413 - WINDOW SHADES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes manually-operated roller shades.

1.2

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B.

1. Include styles, material descriptions, construction details, dimensions of individual components and profiles, features, finishes, and operating instructions for roller shades.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roller shades, including shadeband materials, their orientation to rollers, and their seam and batten locations.

1.3

C.

D.

Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

Roller-Shade Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Maintenance data.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products, or installer approved or licensed by the shade manufacturer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ROLLER SHADES

A.

B.

C.

D.

General: Shade system shall be manually operated shade system, as manufactured by

Mecho Shade Systems, Long Island City, NY or approved equal by Lutron Shading

Solutions, Spring Window Fashions, or Nyson. Shading systems form approved equal manufacturers shall be capable of fitting within pocket sizes indicated. Shades shall be capable of being stopped and held at any number of positions.

1. Operation: Offset side mounted chain operator.

Shade Mounting Brackets: Manufacture's standard bracket assemble. Injection molded delrin or metal cover plates shall be provided for each bracket to conceal the metal brackets from view, and for guiding and retaining the chain gear assembly.

Tubes: Extruded aluminum with internal extruded keyway for engaging drive system on either end of tube. Tubes shall be extruded with two fabric mounting channels. All tubes shall be removable and interchangeable without removing drive assembly, block setting, or readjusting the pre-set stops. Shade tubes shall be self-aligning and self-leveling.

Fabric Mounting: Provide one of the following methods:

WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

1.

2.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Extruded vinyl designed to be snapped and locked into fabric mounting channels on tubes. Splines shall permit removal of fabric without removing tube from retainer brackets.

Fabric shall be connected to the tube with double-sided adhesive strip applied for exact and firm mounting of the fabric and for easy adjustment of fabric to prevent telescoping. A minimum of one turn of fabric will be placed on the roller before the working section of fabric starts, to protect the fabric and smooth out the starting seam.

E.

F.

Fabric-Guide End Caps: Provide injection molded delrin end caps having steel pins which will permit up to 5/16" lateral adjustment in tube width. End caps shall have fabric guides to align and protect shade fabric.

Fascias: Provide formed metal fascias, where required, of 24 gauge steel or 0.060 aluminum. Fascias shall be designed to snap onto brackets without the use of exposed fastening devices. Fascias shall not impede airflow over the top of shade and bracket assembly.

G.

H.

Shade Pockets: Provide either extruded aluminum and or formed steel shade pocket, in gypsum board ceilings, sized to accommodate shades as indicated on the drawings, and with removable closure panel to provide access to shades.

Finishes: All exposed view metal surfaces shall receive a baked-on enamel finish. Color shall be standard color as selected by the Architect.

2.2

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Prior to fabrication, verify actual opening dimensions by accurate site measurements.

Adjust shade sizes for proper fit at each window.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1

I. Fasteners: Provide size and type for secure mounting of shades to type of material and construction provided.

SHADE FABRIC

A. Fabric: Provide as follows. Fabric shall be tensioned in the finishing range prior to heat setting to keep the warp ends straight and minimize or eliminate weave distortion. A weighted hem bar shall be sealed within the bottom bar.

1.

Type: Refer to the “Finish Legend” on drawing A901 for types, colors and openness factor.

ROLLER-SHADE INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, operational clearances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B.

C.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

Install roller shades level, plumb, and aligned with adjacent units, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

D.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Adjust and balance roller shades to operate smoothly, easily, safely, and free from binding or malfunction throughout entire operational range.

E. Clean roller-shade surfaces after installation, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION 122413

WINDOW SHADES 122413 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

SECTION 123600 - SOLID SURFACE MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Extent of solid surface material is shown on the drawings, including solid surface work surfaces.

B. Coordination of Fabrication: Wherever possible, check dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements before final submittal of shop drawings and fabrication of tops. However, coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress as directed by the Contractor to avoid delay of the work. Where necessary, proceed without field measurements and coordinate installation tolerances to ensure proper fit.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. All solid surface material work shall be from the same production run to assure uniformity in color and appearance.

B. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to the greatest extent possible.

Disassemble units only to the extent necessary for shipping and handling limitations.

Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.

C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and fabrication, where possible, to ensure proper fitting of the work. However, do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and fitting wherever the taking of field measurements before fabrication might delay the work.

1.4

1.6

SUBMITTALS:

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit manufacturer's detailed materials and installation specifications and other data for solid surface material.

B. Samples: Submit sample not less than 4" x 4" in size of color, grade and finish of solid surface material required. Sample to include one joint showing method of jointing and finishing.

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, component sizes, fabrication details, attachment provisions and coordination requirements with adjacent work.

D. Maintenance Data: Include recommended cleaning materials and procedures and damage repair.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Protect tops from damage during loading, shipment delivery and storage. Use nonstaining materials for blocking and packing. Stack units at the site in accordance with fabricator's recommendations.

SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 123600 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS:

A. Quartz: Quartz, minimum 93%, combined with resins. Receive templates for plumbing fixtures and sink bowls before cutting or drilling of any tops.

1. Product: Refer to the “Finish Legend” on drawing “A901 for types, manufacturers, colors and patterns.

2.

3.

Thickness: As indicated.

Finish And

Color: Refer to the “Finish Schedule” on drawing “A902”.

B. Sealants And Joint Adhesives: Provide types as recommended by the manufacturer of solid surface material. Colors shall match solid surface material. Joint adhesive shall create inconspicuous, non-porous joints and shall not contain urea formaldehyde.

Elastomeric sealant joints and caulking shall not exceed 250 g/L.

2.2 FABRICATION:

A. General: Fabricate as shown. Cut accurately to shape and dimensions indicated.

Provide holes cut or drilled for anchors, fasteners, brackets as shown and as necessary to secure tops in place.

B. Fabricate components in shop to greatest extent practical to sizes and shapes indicated, in accordance with approved shop drawings and solid polymer manufacturer requirements.

C. No evidence of drilling, cutting or patching shall be exposed in the finished work. Allow for expansion and contraction.

D. Form joints between components, including joints between tops and backsplashes and manufacturer's field installed integral lavatory bowls and sinks using manufacturer's joint adhesive; without conspicuous joints.

E. Finish on all exposed surfaces shall be a uniform finish as scheduled.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION:

Install in accordance with fabricator's approved shop drawings. A.

B. Finished work shall be level, plumb and in correct relationship to adjacent work.

C. Form field joints using manufacturer's recommended adhesive, with joints inconspicuous in finished work.

D. Thermal Movement: Form field joints between panels to accommodate movement between panels, as set forth by the manufacturer.

D. Backsplashes and sidesplashes shall be adhered to tops using manufacturer's standard color-matched silicone sealant.

SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 123600 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

E.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Sealant and Caulking: Caulk all joints between solid surface material and adjoining construction after installation. All uses of sealants and caulking are to be in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

F. Keep components clean during installation. Remove adhesives, sealants and other stains. Replace stained components.

G. Protect surfaces from damage. Repair work or replace damaged work that cannot be repaired to Architect's satisfaction.

END OF SECTION 123600

SOLID SURFACE MATERIAL 123600 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 123640 - STONE TOPS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1. Cut onyx tops.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals for Review:

1. Shop Drawings: Include location and sizes of pieces, arrangement and size of joints, and other details of installation.

2. Samples: 12 x 12 inch stone samples showing color and finish.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Minimum 5 years documented experience in work of this

Section.

B. Obtain stone from a single quarry and from the same area within the quarry.

1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store stone off ground; prevent contact with materials that could cause staining or damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Stone:

1. Type: Onyx.

2. Free from defects that could impair its structural integrity or function. Inherent variations characteristic to quarry from which it is obtained are acceptable.

3. Color within range of samples approved by Architect.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Adhesive: Water cleanable epoxy of type recommended by stone supplier.

B. Joint Sealant: Non-staining, single component, nonsag, neutral curing, silicone.

C. Cleaner: Type recommended by stone supplier.

D. Sealer: Colorless, stain-resistant sealer that does not affect color or physical properties of stone surfaces, as recommended by stone producer for application indicated.

©2011, SpexPlus, Inc.

Jan 2011

12 3640-1 Stone Countertops

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

E. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3, chemical-resistant, water-cleanable, grouting epoxy,

Color shall match stone.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Cut adjacent pieces from same block wherever possible.

B. Cut stone accurately to required shapes and dimensions, with joints dressed straight and square.

C. Fabricate stone for uniform coloration between adjacent units and over full area of installation.

D. Finish exposed edges to smooth, uniform profile as indicated.

E. Fabricate with hairline joints.

F. Cut or saw bed and joint surfaces square for full thickness of unit.

G. Backs: Sawn.

H. Fill fissures with mixture of portland cement, crushed stone chips, and sand to match color of stone; finish flush.

I. Make provisions to accommodate items attached to stone.

J. Make cutouts for fixtures in shop using template or pattern furnished by fixture manufacturer. Form cutouts to smooth, even curves.

K. Fabrication Tolerances:

1. Variation in width or height: Plus or minus 1/16 inch.

2. Variation from true plane: Plus or minus 1/16 inch in 3 feet.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean stone prior to installation. Do not use wire brushes or implements that can mark or damage exposed surfaces.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with approved Shop Drawings.

B. Arrange stone pattern to provide color uniformity and hairline

1/16” joints throughout.

C. Grout joints to comply with ANSI A108.10. Remove temporary shims before grouting. Tool grout uniformly and smoothly.

D. Set stone plumb and level. Align adjacent pieces in same plane.

E. Obtain approval prior to cutting or fitting any item not so indicated on Drawings. Do not impair appearance or strength of stone work by cutting.

©2011, SpexPlus, Inc.

Jan 2011

12 3640-2 Stone Countertops

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

F. Adhere stone to supports with continuous beads of adhesive.

1. Apply adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

2. Press stone to full bond with adhesive.

G. Fill joints in stone and between stone and adjacent construction with sealant as specified in Section

079200; finish flush with face of stone.

H. Installation Tolerances:

1. Maximum variation from level and plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, noncumulative.

2. Maximum variation in plane between adjacent pieces at joint: 1/16 inch.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean stone with stiff brushes and water.

B. If initial cleaning does not produce acceptable results, apply cleaner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

1. Prior to applying, clean sample panel in area as directed by Architect. If approved, use same materials and techniques for cleaning remainder of stone.

2. Protect adjacent surfaces.

3. Thoroughly rinse surfaces with clean water after completion of cleaning; remove all traces of cleaning solution.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Protect stone with nonstaining sheet coverings.

END OF SECTION

©2011, SpexPlus, Inc.

Jan 2011

12 3640-3 Stone Countertops

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

SECTION 127800

–BANQUETTE SEATING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes

1. Built-in, removable, upholstered seating.

1.2

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

2. Related accessories

SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data. Manufacturer's specifications and technical data including performance, construction and fabrication.

B.

C.

1. Manufacturer's installation instructions.

Shop Drawings. Indicate dimensions, description of materials and finishes, general construction, component connections, anchorage methods, hardware, and installation procedures, including specific requirements indicated.

Component Samples. Two sets of samples for each of the following items as specified

1. Finished components.

1.2

2. Upholstery.

D.

3. Accessories If requested by Architect.

Quality Assurance Submittals

1. Manufacturer/fabricator qualifications.

QUALITY ASSURANCE

A.

B.

Mock-up: Provide mock-up as directed. Obtain Architect's acceptance of the mock-up. Furnish replacement units if rejected by the Architect. Dismantle and remove from site all rejected work.

Fabricator's Qualifications

1. Firm with at least 5years’ experience producing and installing the specified products.

2.

3.

Successfully completed at least 5 similar projects; submit list with the names and telephone numbers of knowledgeable client contacts.

Firm shall have the personnel, facilities and resources to produce, deliver and install the specified materials within the Construction Schedule.

C.

4. If fabricator will not install its work then it shall train and maintain a record of acceptable installers.

Material Qualifications

1. Regardless of shop standards, the Work provided under this Section shall conform to the applicable requirements of the AWI Quality Standards as they pertain to the Quality

Grade/s specified, unless specifically stated otherwise in this Section.

BENCH SEATING 127800 - 1

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

2.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Do not interpret references made in this Specification to individual Sections or Articles of the AWI Standards to mean that other relevant provisions of the AWI Standards do not apply.

1.3

3. The specified Quality Grade applies throughout the work.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Packing and Shipping

1. Deliver products in original unopened packaging with legible manufacturer's identification.

2. Wrap or crate banquette seating items in a manner to prevent damage during shipping, handling and installation.

1.4

B.

C.

3. Label each unit for its intended location. Loss or obscuring of unit identification markings, prior to acceptance of its installation, may be grounds for rejection of the work.

Acceptance at Site. Do not deliver banquette seating to site until spaces in which it will be installed are ready to receive it.

Storage and Protection

1. Store materials in weatherproof, climate controlled enclosure.

2. a. b.

Relative humidity: not less than 25 percent nor more than 55 percent.

Ambient air temperature: not less than 50 degrees F.

Stack on framework or blocking, with air space of not less than 6 inches underneath; provide for adequate air circulation or ventilation.

3. Protect corners of materials from damage or breaking.

PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditioning

1. Do not install Work until interior wet operations are complete.

2. Maintain ambient air temperature and relative humidity of the space/s in which this work will be installed within the ranges indicated for at least 5 days before beginning this work.

3.

4. a. Relative humidity: not less than 25 percent nor more than 55 percent. b. Ambient air temperature: not less than 60 degrees F.

Store benches and accessory items in the spaces in which they will be installed for at least 24-hours prior to installation.

After installation, control temperature and maintain relative humidity within ranges acceptable to the bench fabricator.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION

A. Factory-mark each piece of lumber with type, grade, mill and grading agency, except omit marking from surfaces to be exposed transparent finish or without finish.

BENCH SEATING 127800 - 2

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

B.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Nominal sizes are indicated, except as shown by detail dimensions.

1. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

C.

D.

E.

F.

G.

2. Provide seasoned lumber with 15% maximum moisture content at time of dressing.

Miscellaneous Lumber:

1. Provide wood for support or attachment of other work including nailers, blocking, and similar members. Provide lumber of sizes indicated worked into shapes shown, and as follows: a. Moisture Content: 15% maximum for lumber items not specified to receive wood preservative treatment.

2. Grade: Douglas Fir or Southern Pine with no defects affecting strength.

Plywood:

1. Trademark: Identify each plywood panel with appropriate APA trademark.

2. Plywood: Provide fire-retardant treated plywood panels with grade designation, APA A-D

EXPOSURE 1, in thickness indicated.

Medium density fiberboard, fire retardant treated, free of formaldehyde resin, having a density of not less than 48 lbs./cu. ft., and complying with ASTM D 1037.

Upholstery: Refer the “Finish Legend” on drawing A901” for types, colors, and manufacturers of upholstery.

Foam Cushions: Polyurethane foam having a density of not be less than 2.8 lbs./cu. ft. and complying with the following:

1. All foam, and fill materials auxiliary to the foam (such as wrappings and batting between foam and upholstery, etc.) shall have flame-retardant characteristics at least equal to those of the foam as listed below:

2. a. California Technical Bulletin #117.

All fill materials auxiliary to the foam (such as wrappings and batting between foam and upholstery, etc.) shall have flame-retardant. When the flame-retardant foam is subjected to the temperatures occurring in fires, the emissions shall be non-toxic.

H.

3.

4.

BENCH SEATING

3. Manufacturer shall submit certified copies of complete test reports by a recognized independent testing laboratory attesting that the flame-retardant foam cushions to be furnished and installed under this heading meets the above specified requirements.

Plastic Laminate: Comply with the requirements of "Publication No. LD3" by the National

Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) for the following:

1.

2.

General Purpose Laminate: NEMA General-purpose type, Grade GP-50, nominal 0.050" thickness for horizontal surfaces, and GP-28, nominal 0.028 thickness for vertical surfaces.

Surface Finish and Colors:

Refer to “Finish Legend” on drawing A901..

Finish: Low reflective, unless otherwise indicated or scheduled.

Colors: Refer to the “Finish Schedule” on drawing “A901” for types, colors, patterns and manufacturers.

127800 - 3

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

I. Natural Finished Wood:

1.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Exposed Wood Veneers: Provide wood veneers complying with the requirements established by AWI. a. Species And Cut:

Refer to “Finish Legend” on sheet A901 for wood species and type. b. Grade: AA.

2. Semi-Exposed Wood Veneers: Provide wood veneers complying with the requirements established by AWI.

3.

4. a. b. c.

Species And Cut: Same as exposed wood veneers.

Grade: A.

Description: See grade summary table AWI Standard Section 4.2a.

Unexposed Back Veneers: Provide wood veneers complying with the requirements established by AWI. a. b. c.

Species And Cut: Mill option.

Grade: Mill option.

Description: Provide sound veneer with no open defects to provide a balanced panel construction.

Solid Hardwood Wood: Same species as face veneers they are used in conjunction with, plain sawn, and complying with the grading requirements specified. Solid wood shall be selected to match color and graining of wood face veneers. a. Grade: Premium, Grade I.

J.

4.

5.

Transparent Finish (for natural finished hardwood): Comply with requirements indicated below for grade, finish system, staining, and sheen.

1.

2.

3.

Grade: Premium.

Finishes: AWI Finish System catalyzed lacquer or conversion varnish.

Effect: Stain and filled matching Architect's control sample for texture, sheen and color.

Stain shall be a dye type stain, pigmented stain shall not permitted.

Sheen: Satin-medium rubbed effect.

Visual Tests for Exposed Surfaces: The following items will not be permitted: f. g. d. e. a. b. c.

Finish Sanding Scratches.

Orange Peel (Slight depressions in surfaces, similar to skin of and orange).

Runs (Running of wet finish films in rivulets).

Sags (Partial slipping of finish film creating "curtain" effect).

Blistering: (Small, swelled areas like water blisters on human skin).

Blushing.

Checking, Crazing (Crowfeet separation or irregular line separation).

BENCH SEATING 127800 - 4

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

h. i. j.

Cracking (Formation like dried mud).

Glue spots, putty spots, or smears.

Filled finish brad or screw holes. k.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

1)

2)

Not permitted on free-standing woodwork.

Noticeable beyond 36" on installed work.

Field repairs and touch-ups

–Noticeable beyond 18".

K.

L.

M.

N.

Assemble units in the shop in as large components as practical to minimize field cutting and jointing.

Fasteners: Select fasteners of size that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members.

Install fasteners without splitting of wood; predrill as required.

Install upholstery with seams sewn, using permanent type construction which is of sufficient strength for stretching and wear without failure during the life of the fabric.

Upholstery (Sewing):

1. Cut upholstery either on the thread or by patterns, whichever is applicable.

2.

3.

Table upholstery square in the shop and trim to appropriate size.

Stitch upholstery together so they are uniform in width.

4.

5.

6.

Sewing shall be perfectly straight on a line.

Seams shall be flat.

Upholstery patterns and grain shall be level and flat, and matched from panel to panel.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify Conditions. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion.

3.2

3.3

1. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION

A. Take measurements at the Site; fabricate work to fit measured dimensions.

INSTALLATION

A. Install items to comply with manufacturer's instructions and with Section 1700 of AWI Quality

Standards, for the Premium Quality Grade.

B. Install plumb, level, and without distortions. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners.

Where casework abuts other finished work, field scribe fillers and tops for uniform tight fit. Gap shall be uniform in dimension, less than 1/16-inch. Seal top and exposed edges of back- and end-splashes to wall.

BENCH SEATING 127800 - 5

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF - HOUSTON

HOK 13-01051-00

C.

JULY 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Anchor banquette seating securely in place with concealed fasteners, into structural support members. Comply with manufacturer's instructions for support of units.

D. Install accessory materials following each manufacturer's recommendations.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Clean bench and banquette seating. Remove packaging and debris from site.

B.

C.

D.

Touch-up, repair, or remove and replace defective Work as directed by the Architect.

Touch-up, repair, or remove and replace defective Work as directed by the Architect.

Protection: Cover completed work with 4-mil polyethylene film protective enclosure, applied in a manner which will allow easy removal and without damage to woodwork or adjoining work.

Remove cover immediately before time of final acceptance

END OF SECTION 126800

BENCH SEATING 127800 - 6

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF HOUSTON

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

SECTION 265100.10

Parsons Brinckerhoff Houston (13.01051.00)

Spec Section 265100.10 Lighting Fixture Schedule

July 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Abbreviations: LF = Linear Foot; SF = Square Foot; CMH = Ceramic Metal Halide; OC = On Center; TBD = To Be Determined; BF = Ballast Factor

Abbreviations: CBCP = Center Beam Candle Power; CRI = Color Rendering Index; IN CS = In Cross Section; MOD = Modification

Luminaires - Building

Luminaire

Type

Luminaire Description, Specification &

Location, etc.

Type "H"

H01

Luminaire Manufacturer &

Catalog Number

Lamp

Type

RECESSED 2'X2' VOLUMETRIC DISTRIBUTION LUMINAIRE WITH CENTER COOPER NEORAY:

CHANNEL AESTHETIC, MICROGLOW PRISMATIC LENS AND HIGH

EFFICIENCY PERFORMANCE.

LUMINOUS HE 282

282-R-2-T5-X-VOLT-EB(1.15BF)-SI-95RE

LF01:

F14T5

LAMPING: (2) 2'-0" 14 WATT T5 LIN. FLUOR.

TRIM: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE TRIM OPTIONS

AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

NOMINAL SIZE: 24"X24"

HOUSING: STEEL

SHIELDING: OPAL SATIN DIFFUSER WITH RECT. PERF (NEORAY)

EFFICIENCY MINIMUM: 80%

MOUNTING: CEILING RECESSED

BALLAST: ELECTRONIC PROGRAMMED RAPID START

BALLAST FACTOR: 1.15

CONTROL: OCCUPANCY SENSOR

LOCATION: PRIMARILY PRIVATE OFFICE

NOTE:

SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR INDICATION OF SUFFIX "-EM"

LUMINAIRES REQUIRING SPECIAL EMERGENGY BATTERY

BALLAST/DRIVER PROVISIONS. PROVIDE AS INDICATED ON

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS IF NECESSARY.

NOTE:

NO EQUAL. PRICING ON FILE WITH

ARCHITECT AND OWNER.

Lamp

Qty.

Wattage

Ea. Lamp Total

2 14 39

Voltage

-

H01D

IDENTICAL TO H01 EXCEPT:

BALLAST: COMPATIBLE WITH DIMMING CONTROLS AS APPLICABLE

BALLAST FACTOR: 1.0

CONTROL: DIMMING, ENSURE COMPATIBILITY WITH DIMMING SYSTEM

LOCATION: CONFERENCE

PER H01 WITH CERTAIN EXCEPTIONS

PER THIS SPEC

LF01:

F14T5

2 14 33 -

H02

RECESSED 2'X4' VOLUMETRIC DISTRIBUTION LUMINAIRE WITH CENTER COOPER - NEORAY:

CHANNEL AESTHETIC, MICROGLOW PRISMATIC LENS AND HIGH

EFFICIENCY PERFORMANCE.

LUMINOUS HE 284

284-R-2-T5-X-VOLT-EB-SI-95RE

LAMPING: (2) 4'-0" 28 WATT T5 LIN. FLUOR.

TRIM: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE TRIM OPTIONS

AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

NOMINAL SIZE: 24"X48"

HOUSING: STEEL

SHIELDING: OPAL SATIN DIFFUSER WITH RECT. PERF (NEORAY)

EFFICIENCY MINIMUM: 80%

MOUNTING: CEILING RECESSED

BALLAST: ELECTRONIC PROGRAMMED RAPID START

CONTROL: TIMER RELAY & OCCUPANCY SENSOR

LOCATION: PRIMARILY GENERAL OPEN OFFICE

NOTE:

NO EQUAL. PRICING ON FILE WITH

ARCHITECT AND OWNER.

NOTE:

SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR INDICATION OF SUFFIX "-EM"

LUMINAIRES REQUIRING SPECIAL EMERGENGY BATTERY

BALLAST/DRIVER PROVISIONS. PROVIDE AS INDICATED ON

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS IF NECESSARY.

LF03:

F28T5

H02D

IDENTICAL TO H02 EXCEPT:

BALLAST: COMPATIBLE WITH DIMMING CONTROLS AS APPLICABLE

BALLAST FACTOR: 1.0

CONTROL: DIMMING, ENSURE COMPATIBILITY WITH DIMMING SYSTEM

LOCATION: CONFERENCE

PER H02 WITH CERTAIN EXCEPTIONS

PER THIS SPEC

LF03:

F28T5

2

2

28

28

58

58 -

-

HOK 13.01051.00

265100.10-1 07 JULY 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF HOUSTON

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

SECTION 265100.10

Parsons Brinckerhoff Houston (13.01051.00)

Spec Section 265100.10 Lighting Fixture Schedule

July 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Abbreviations: LF = Linear Foot; SF = Square Foot; CMH = Ceramic Metal Halide; OC = On Center; TBD = To Be Determined; BF = Ballast Factor

Abbreviations: CBCP = Center Beam Candle Power; CRI = Color Rendering Index; IN CS = In Cross Section; MOD = Modification

Luminaires - Building

Luminaire

Type

Luminaire Description, Specification &

Location, etc.

Type "H"

H03

Luminaire Manufacturer &

Catalog Number

RECESSED ROUND APERTURE LED DOWNLIGHT LUMINAIRE.

LAMPING: WHITE LED

COLOR TEMPERATURE: 3500K

COLOR RENDERING INDEX: 80 OR ABOVE

COLOR CONSISTENCY: 2-STEP MACADAM'S ELLIPSE

MAXIMUM WATTAGE: 16

DELIVERED LUMENS: 1,085

LED LIFE: L70 AT 50,000 HOURS

ADJUSTABILITY: NONE

BEAM SPREAD DISTRIBUTION: 50°

APERTURE SIZE: 4.5"

MOUNTING: INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

MOUNTING: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE MOUNTING

OPTIONS AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

MOUNTING (ACT/METAL/WOOD): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (GYP.): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (EUROSPAN): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

REFLECTOR: CLEAR MATTE ALZAK BEVEL WITH PAINTED FLANGE

FLANGE FINISH: WHITE FOR WHITE CEILINGS, METAL FOR WOOD

LENS: SOLITE, DIFFUSE

POWER SUPPLY: FULL RANGE DIMMING AS STANDARD

VOLTAGE: INTEGRAL UNIVERSAL 120-277V

CONTROL: VARIES

LOCATION: GENERAL

NOTE:

SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR INDICATION OF SUFFIX "-EM"

LUMINAIRES REQUIRING SPECIAL EMERGENGY BATTERY

BALLAST/DRIVER PROVISIONS. PROVIDE AS INDICATED ON

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS IF NECESSARY.

FOCAL POINT:

ID LED

FL4D-11LED-L35-LD1-VOLT-RO-T

L4-RO-DN-CD-WP

OR AESTHETIC & PERFORMANCE

EQUAL BY:

KURT VERSEN

TECH LIGHTING

USA ILLUMINATION

LED

Lamp

Type

Lamp

Qty.

Wattage

Ea. Lamp Total

16

Voltage

-

2 28 60 -

H04

RECESSED 2'X4' FLUORESCENT LENSED TROFFER LUMINAIRE.

LAMPING: (2) 4'-0" 28 WATT T5 LIN. FLUOR.

MOUNTING: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE MOUNTING

OPTIONS AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

LOCATION: STORAGE, SERVER ROOM

PRUDENTIAL:

P-8600

OR AESTHETIC & PERFORMANCE

EQUAL BY:

LITHONIA

METALUX

LF03:

F28T5

HOK 13.01051.00

265100.10-2 07 JULY 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF HOUSTON

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

SECTION 265100.10

Parsons Brinckerhoff Houston (13.01051.00)

Spec Section 265100.10 Lighting Fixture Schedule

July 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Abbreviations: LF = Linear Foot; SF = Square Foot; CMH = Ceramic Metal Halide; OC = On Center; TBD = To Be Determined; BF = Ballast Factor

Abbreviations: CBCP = Center Beam Candle Power; CRI = Color Rendering Index; IN CS = In Cross Section; MOD = Modification

Luminaires - Building

Luminaire

Type

Luminaire Description, Specification &

Location, etc.

Type "H"

H05

Luminaire Manufacturer &

Catalog Number

RECESSED ROUND APERTURE LED ADJUSTABLE ACCENT DOWNLIGHT USA ILLUMINATION:

LUMINAIRE.

BEVELED 2.0

3231A30-AC1-S-10-LRTA4-8412-C2-30KS-

30-NC-VOLT LAMPING: WARM WHITE LED

COLOR TEMPERATURE: 3000K

COLOR RENDERING INDEX: 80 OR ABOVE

COLOR CONSISTENCY: 2-STEP MACADAM'S ELLIPSE

MAXIMUM WATTAGE: 12

DELIVERED LUMENS: 950

OR AESTHETIC & PERFORMANCE

EQUAL BY:

FOCAL POINT

KURT VERSEN

TECH LIGHTING

LED LIFE: L70 AT 50,000 HOURS

ADJUSTABILITY: 40°

BEAM SPREAD DISTRIBUTION: 30°

APERTURE SIZE: 4.5"

MOUNTING: INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

MOUNTING: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE MOUNTING

OPTIONS AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

MOUNTING (ACT/METAL/WOOD): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (GYP.): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (EUROSPAN): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

REFLECTOR: CLEAR MATTE ALZAK BEVEL WITH PAINTED FLANGE

FLANGE FINISH: WHITE FOR WHITE CEILINGS, METAL FOR WOOD

LENS: SOLITE, DIFFUSE

POWER SUPPLY: FULL RANGE DIMMING AS STANDARD

VOLTAGE: INTEGRAL UNIVERSAL 120-277V

CONTROL: PROGRAMMABLE RELAY

LOCATION: SEATING AREA BEHIND WOOD SCREEN IN EUROSPAN

CEILING

LED

NOTE:

SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR INDICATION OF SUFFIX "-EM"

LUMINAIRES REQUIRING SPECIAL EMERGENGY BATTERY

BALLAST/DRIVER PROVISIONS. PROVIDE AS INDICATED ON

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS IF NECESSARY.

Lamp

Type

Lamp

Qty.

Wattage

Ea. Lamp Total

12

Voltage

-

H06

4'-0" LENGTH DIRECT DISTRIBUTION LINEAR LED DECORATIVE

PENDANT LUMINAIRE WITH CLEAR ACRYLIC LIGHTGUIDE LIGHT

DELIVERY TECHNOLOGY.

LAMPING: WARM WHITE LED

COLOR TEMPERATURE: 3000K

COLOR RENDERING INDEX: 80 OR ABOVE

MAXIMUM WATTAGE: 11 PER FOOT

LED LIFE: L70 AT 50,000 HOURS

BEAM SPREAD DISTRIBUTION: MEDIUM

CROSS SECTION SIZE: 5"HX1"W

HEAT SINK FINISH: TBD

MOUNTING HEIGHT: TBD

POWER SUPPLY: FULL RANGE DIMMING AS STANDARD

POWER SUPPLY: REMOTE LOCATION IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING

VOLTAGE: INTEGRAL UNIVERSAL 120-277V

CONTROL: PROGRAMMABLE RELAY

LOCATION: CAFÉ

3M DESIGN LIGHTING:

SHEER

NOTE:

NO EQUAL. PRICING ON FILE WITH

ARCHITECT AND OWNER.

LED 45 -

HOK 13.01051.00

265100.10-3 07 JULY 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF HOUSTON

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

SECTION 265100.10

Parsons Brinckerhoff Houston (13.01051.00)

Spec Section 265100.10 Lighting Fixture Schedule

July 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Abbreviations: LF = Linear Foot; SF = Square Foot; CMH = Ceramic Metal Halide; OC = On Center; TBD = To Be Determined; BF = Ballast Factor

Abbreviations: CBCP = Center Beam Candle Power; CRI = Color Rendering Index; IN CS = In Cross Section; MOD = Modification

Luminaires - Building

Luminaire

Type

Luminaire Description, Specification &

Location, etc.

Type "H"

H07

Luminaire Manufacturer &

Catalog Number

RECESSED ROUND APERTURE LED DOWNLIGHT LUMINAIRE.

LAMPING: WARM WHITE LED

COLOR TEMPERATURE: 3000K

COLOR RENDERING INDEX: 80 OR ABOVE

COLOR CONSISTENCY: 2-STEP MACADAM'S ELLIPSE

MAXIMUM WATTAGE: 16

DELIVERED LUMENS: 1,250

LED LIFE: L70 AT 50,000 HOURS

ADJUSTABILITY: NONE

BEAM SPREAD DISTRIBUTION: 30°

APERTURE SIZE: 4.5"

MOUNTING: INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

MOUNTING: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE MOUNTING

OPTIONS AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

MOUNTING (ACT/METAL/WOOD): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (GYP.): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (EUROSPAN): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

REFLECTOR: CLEAR MATTE ALZAK BEVEL WITH PAINTED FLANGE

FLANGE FINISH: WHITE FOR WHITE CEILINGS, METAL FOR WOOD

LENS: SOLITE, DIFFUSE

POWER SUPPLY: FULL RANGE DIMMING AS STANDARD

VOLTAGE: INTEGRAL UNIVERSAL 120-277V

CONTROL: VARIES

LOCATION: RECEPTION, CAFE

NOTE:

SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR INDICATION OF SUFFIX "-EM"

LUMINAIRES REQUIRING SPECIAL EMERGENGY BATTERY

BALLAST/DRIVER PROVISIONS. PROVIDE AS INDICATED ON

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS IF NECESSARY.

USA ILLUMINATION:

BEVELED 2.0

3021-AC1-10-LRTD4-9016-C2-30KS-30-NC-

LED

VOLT

OR AESTHETIC & PERFORMANCE

EQUAL BY:

FOCAL POINT

KURT VERSEN

TECH LIGHTING

Lamp

Type

Lamp

Qty.

Wattage

Ea. Lamp Total

16

Voltage

-

1 14 19 -

H08D

2'-0" LENGTH RECESSED LINEAR FLUORESCENT WALLWASH

LUMINAIRE.

FOCAL POINT:

AVENUE A RECESSED

LAMPING: (1) 2'-0" 14 WATT T5 LIN. FLUOR.

APERTURE SIZE: 4" WIDE

MOUNTING: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE MOUNTING

OPTIONS AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

BALLAST: COMPATIBLE WITH DIMMING CONTROLS AS APPLICABLE

CONTROL: DIMMING, ENSURE COMPATIBILITY WITH DIMMING SYSTEM

LOCATION: CONFERENCE

OR AESTHETIC & PERFORMANCE

EQUAL BY:

ELLIPTIPAR

LINEAR

PEERLESS

LF01:

F14T5

H09

X'-0" LENGTH (PER LIGHTING PLANS) CONTINUOUS RECESSED MUD-TOFOCAL POINT:

APERTURE LINEAR FLUORESCENT FLUSH-LENS GLOW LUMINAIRE.

SEEM 4

LAMPING (IN CS): (1) 3'-0"/4'-0" 21/28 WATT T5HE LINEAR FLUOR.

APERTURE SIZE: 4" WIDTH

MOUNTING (GYP.): TRIMLESS, MUD-TO-APERTURE REQUIRED

REGRESS DEPTH: NONE, FLUSH

LENS: DIFFUSE

BALLAST: PROGRAMMED RAPID START

CONTROL: PROGRAMMABLE RELAY

LOCATION: CERTAIN SOFFITS

NOTE:

MANUFACTURER SHALL PROVIDE NO DARK SPOTS OR EXCESSIVE

BRIGHT SPOTS DUE TO STAGGERED LAMPING CONDITION.

OR AESTHETIC & PERFORMANCE

EQUAL BY:

ALIGHT

AXIS

LINEAR

MARK ARCHITECTURAL

NEORAY

PRUDENTIAL

LF02:

F21T5

LF03:

F28T5

(1) IN CS 21

28

8 W/LF -

HOK 13.01051.00

265100.10-4 07 JULY 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF HOUSTON

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

SECTION 265100.10

Parsons Brinckerhoff Houston (13.01051.00)

Spec Section 265100.10 Lighting Fixture Schedule

July 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Abbreviations: LF = Linear Foot; SF = Square Foot; CMH = Ceramic Metal Halide; OC = On Center; TBD = To Be Determined; BF = Ballast Factor

Abbreviations: CBCP = Center Beam Candle Power; CRI = Color Rendering Index; IN CS = In Cross Section; MOD = Modification

Luminaires - Building

Luminaire

Type

Luminaire Description, Specification &

Location, etc.

Type "H"

H10D

Luminaire Manufacturer &

Catalog Number

X'-0" LENGTH (PER LIGHTING PLANS) CONTINUOUS RECESSED

REGRESSED LENS FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE WITH STAGGERED

LAMPING AND NO BREAKS ACROSS GRID LINES FOR A CONTINUOUS

GLOW.

FOCAL POINT:

AVENUE 6/SEEM 6 REGRESSED

FAV6-SR-1T5-1C-VOLT-D-XX-WH

LAMPING (IN CS): (1) 3'-0"/4'-0" 21/28 WATT T5HE LIN. FLUOR.

APERTURE SIZE: 6" WIDTH

REGRESS DEPTH: 1"

MOUNTING: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE MOUNTING

OPTIONS AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

LENS: DIFFUSE

BALLAST: PROGRAMMED RAPID START

BALLAST: COMPATIBLE WITH DIMMING CONTROLS AS APPLICABLE

CONTROL: DIMMING, ENSURE COMPATIBILITY WITH DIMMING SYSTEM

LOCATION: LARGE CONFERENCE

OR APPROVED AESTHETIC &

PERFORMANCE EQUAL BY:

LINEAR

MARK ARCHITECTURAL

PRUDENTIAL

NOTE:

MANUFACTURER SHALL PROVIDE NO DARK SPOTS OR EXCESSIVE

BRIGHT SPOTS DUE TO STAGGERED LAMPING CONDITION.

Lamp

Type

LF02:

F21T5

LF03:

F28T5

Lamp

Qty.

Wattage

Ea. Lamp Total

(1) IN CS 21

28

8 W/LF

Voltage

-

11 -

H11

RECESSED ROUND 2" APERTURE LED DOWNLIGHT LUMINAIRE VIA

REMODEL HOUSING TO SAVE SIZE DUE TO TIGHT RECESSED SIZE

CONSTRAINTS.

LAMPING: WARM WHITE LED

COLOR TEMPERATURE: 3000K

COLOR RENDERING INDEX: 90 OR ABOVE

COLOR CONSISTENCY: 2-STEP MACADAM'S ELLIPSE

MAXIMUM WATTAGE: 11

DELIVERED LUMENS: 800

LED LIFE: L70 AT 50,000 HOURS

ADJUSTABILITY: NONE

BEAM SPREAD DISTRIBUTION: MEDIUM

APERTURE SIZE: 2.5"

MOUNTING: INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

MOUNTING: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE MOUNTING

OPTIONS AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

MOUNTING (ACT/METAL/WOOD): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (GYP.): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (EUROSPAN): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

REFLECTOR/FLANGE FINISH: SAMPLES REQUIRED

LENS: SOLITE, DIFFUSE

LENS: SANDBLASTED

POWER SUPPLY: FULL RANGE DIMMING AS STANDARD

VOLTAGE: INTEGRAL UNIVERSAL 120-277V

CONTROL: PROGRAMMABLE RELAY

LOCATION: WOOD SCREEN WALL

CON-TECH:

RA2LRM

130KC-VOLT-M

FINISH TBD

SANDBLAST

OR AESTHETIC & PERFORMANCE

EQUAL BY:

FOCAL POINT

KURT VERSEN

TECH LIGHTING

USA ILLUMINATION

LED

H12D

IDENTICAL TO H03 EXCEPT:

POWER SUPPLY: COMPATIBLE WITH DIMMING CONTROLS

CONTROL: DIMMING, ENSURE COMPATIBILITY WITH DIMMING SYSTEM

CONTROL: CONFERENCE

PER H03 WITH CERTAIN EXCEPTIONS

PER THIS SPEC

LED

H13

11", 21" OR 41" LENGTH (SEE LIGHTING PLANS) UNDER-CABINET/UNDERCOLOR KINETICS:

CASEWORK MOUNTED LED TASK LUMINAIRE.

EW PROFILE POWERCORE

LAMPING: WARM WHITE LED

COLOR TEMPERATURE: 3000K

FINISH: GRAY/SILVER

DRIVER: INTEGRAL

MOUNTING ORIENTATION: FACE LEDS TOWARD BACK WALL

MOUNTING: SEE CASEWORK DETAILS FOR PLACEMENT

VOLTAGE: INTEGRAL UNIVERSAL 120-277V

CONTROL: HARD WIRED AT ALL LOCATIONS, NO ROCKER SWITCHES

LOCATION: BREAK AREA

NOTE:

LUMINAIRES SHOULD BE INSTALLED AS CONTINUOUSLY AS

CASEWORK ALLOWS USING THE AVAILABLE STANDARD LUMINAIRE

LENGTHS AND NECESSARY CONNECTORS.

OR AESTHETIC & PERFORMANCE

EQUAL BY:

LUMENPULSE

TECH LIGHTING

TRAXON

LED -

-

-

16

6 W/LF -

-

HOK 13.01051.00

265100.10-5 07 JULY 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF HOUSTON

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

SECTION 265100.10

Parsons Brinckerhoff Houston (13.01051.00)

Spec Section 265100.10 Lighting Fixture Schedule

July 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Abbreviations: LF = Linear Foot; SF = Square Foot; CMH = Ceramic Metal Halide; OC = On Center; TBD = To Be Determined; BF = Ballast Factor

Abbreviations: CBCP = Center Beam Candle Power; CRI = Color Rendering Index; IN CS = In Cross Section; MOD = Modification

Luminaires - Building

Luminaire

Type

Luminaire Description, Specification &

Location, etc.

Type "H"

H14

H15

Luminaire Manufacturer &

Catalog Number

13" DIAMETER DECORATIVE GLOW-BALL PENDANT LUMINAIRE WITH

COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPING.

LAMPING: 26W CFL

MOUNTING: ALIGN BOTTOM OF PENDANT WITH +6'-0" AFF

LOCATION: CAFÉ BANQUETTE

FLOS:

GLOW-BALL-S1-13" DIAMETER

NOTE:

NO EQUAL. PRICING ON FILE WITH

ARCHITECT AND OWNER.

CFL

RECESSED ROUND APERTURE LED ADJUSTABLE ACCENT DOWNLIGHT USA ILLUMINATION:

LUMINAIRE.

BEVELED 2.0

3231A30-AC1-S-10-LRTA4-8416-C2-30KS-

LAMPING: WARM WHITE LED 30-NC-VOLT

COLOR TEMPERATURE: 3000K

COLOR RENDERING INDEX: 80 OR ABOVE

COLOR CONSISTENCY: 2-STEP MACADAM'S ELLIPSE

MAXIMUM WATTAGE: 16

DELIVERED LUMENS: 1,300

LED LIFE: L70 AT 50,000 HOURS

OR AESTHETIC & PERFORMANCE

EQUAL BY:

ADJUSTABILITY: 40°

BEAM SPREAD DISTRIBUTION: 30°

APERTURE SIZE: 4.5"

MOUNTING: INSTALL PER MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS

MOUNTING: CONTRACTOR TO COORDINATE LUMINAIRE MOUNTING

OPTIONS AND CEILING COMPATIBILITY

FOCAL POINT

KURT VERSEN

TECH LIGHTING

MOUNTING (ACT/METAL/WOOD): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (GYP.): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

MOUNTING (EUROSPAN): OVERLAP FLANGE TRIM REQUIRED

REFLECTOR: CLEAR MATTE ALZAK BEVEL WITH PAINTED FLANGE

FLANGE FINISH: WHITE FOR WHITE CEILINGS, METAL FOR WOOD

LENS: SOLITE, DIFFUSE

POWER SUPPLY: FULL RANGE DIMMING AS STANDARD

VOLTAGE: INTEGRAL UNIVERSAL 120-277V

CONTROL: PROGRAMMABLE RELAY

LOCATION: RECEPTION DESK, SIGNAGE/DISPLAY

LED

NOTE:

SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR INDICATION OF SUFFIX "-EM"

LUMINAIRES REQUIRING SPECIAL EMERGENGY BATTERY

BALLAST/DRIVER PROVISIONS. PROVIDE AS INDICATED ON

ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS IF NECESSARY.

Lamp

Type

Lamp

Qty.

Wattage

Ea. Lamp Total

-

1 26

-

30

16

Voltage

-

-

7.5

-

H16

12" HEIGHT, 2.5" DIAMETER CYLINDRICAL LED PENDANT DOWNLIGHT

LUMINAIRE WITH SPECIAL CLEAR ACRYLIC DECORATIVE LENS.

3M DESIGN LIGHTING:

VESSEL TALL

LAMPING: WARM WHITE LED

COLOR TEMPERATURE: 3000K

COLOR RENDERING INDEX: 80 OR ABOVE

MAXIMUM WATTAGE: 7.5

LED LIFE: L70 AT 50,000 HOURS

FINISH: TBD

MOUNTING HEIGHT: TBD

POWER SUPPLY: FULL RANGE DIMMING AS STANDARD

POWER SUPPLY: REMOTE LOCATION IN ACCESSIBLE CEILING

VOLTAGE: INTEGRAL UNIVERSAL 120-277V

CONTROL: PROGRAMMABLE RELAY

LOCATION: CAFÉ

NOTE:

NO EQUAL. PRICING ON FILE WITH

ARCHITECT AND OWNER.

LED

D1

RECESSED 6" APERTURE OPEN DOWNLIGHT WITH CLEAR ALZAK

REFLECTOR

LAMPING: (1) 32W TRIPLE TUBE CF

REFLECTOR/TRIM: FLANGED - COMFORT CLEAR WHITE FLANGE

BALLAST: MULTI-WATTAGE 26W-32W-42W

VERIFY PLENUM DEPTH AVAILABLE

LOCATION USED: GENERAL

LIGHTOLIER:

8021CCLW-S6132BU

LC01:

CF32TRT

1 32 36 -

HOK 13.01051.00

265100.10-6 07 JULY 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF HOUSTON

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

SECTION 265100.10

Parsons Brinckerhoff Houston (13.01051.00)

Spec Section 265100.10 Lighting Fixture Schedule

July 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Abbreviations: LF = Linear Foot; SF = Square Foot; CMH = Ceramic Metal Halide; OC = On Center; TBD = To Be Determined; BF = Ballast Factor

Abbreviations: CBCP = Center Beam Candle Power; CRI = Color Rendering Index; IN CS = In Cross Section; MOD = Modification

Lamp Schedule

Lamp

Type

LFS

Reference

Lamp Group Lamp

Description

Type "LF" Linear Fluorescent Lamp Types

LF01

LF02

LF03

LF01:

F14T5

LF02:

F21T5

LF03:

F28T5

FLUOR. LINEAR

FLUOR. LINEAR

FLUOR. LINEAR

T5 STAN. 2'-0"

T5 STAN. 3'-0"

T5 STAN. 4'-0"

Type "LC" Compact Fluorescent Lamp Types

LC01

LC01:

CF32TRT

FLUOR. COMPACT TRIPLE BIAX

4-PIN, GX24

Lamp Color

Wattage Temp (K)

14

21

28

32

3500

3500

3500

4100

GE

F14WT5/8--

F21WT5/8--

F28WT5/8--

F32TBX/8--/A/4P/EOL

Lamp Codes by Manufacturer

Philips Osram-Sylvania

F14T5/8--

F21T5/8--

F28T5/8--

PL-T 32W/8--/AP/ALTO

EQUAL

EQUAL

FP28/8--

CF32DT/E/IN/8--

HOK 13.01051.00

265100.10-7 07 JULY 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

PARSONS BRINCKERHOFF HOUSTON

LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE

SECTION 265100.10

Parsons Brinckerhoff Houston (13.01051.00)

Spec Section 265100.10 Lighting Fixture Schedule

July 7, 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Abbreviations: LF = Linear Foot; SF = Square Foot; CMH = Ceramic Metal Halide; OC = On Center; TBD = To Be Determined; BF = Ballast Factor

Abbreviations: CBCP = Center Beam Candle Power; CRI = Color Rendering Index; IN CS = In Cross Section; MOD = Modification

General Notes

(General Notes apply to all luminaires on the Lighting Fixture Schedule. See Specification Section 265100/265600 for complete lighting specs.)

A REFER TO ARCHITECTURAL/LANDSCAPE DOCUMENTS FOR EXACT MOUNTING LOCATIONS, DETAILS, AND CONFIGURATIONS OF ALL LIGHTING FIXTURES. IF DRAWINGS

DO NOT CLARIFY EXACT MOUNTING LOCATION OR DETAIL, CONTRACTOR SHALL ISSUE AN RFI TO LIGHTING DESIGNER TO SPECIFICALLY CLARIFY PRIOR TO FIXTURE

ROUGH-IN. ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS SHALL NOT BE UTILIZED TO DETERMINE LIGHT FIXTURE LOCATIONS.

B CONTRACTOR TO VERIFY THE COMPATIBILITY OF LIGHT FIXTURES WITH CEILING MATERIAL, ADJACENT FINISHES, ADJACENT CONSTRUCTION AND MATERIALS PRIOR

TO SHOP DRAWINGS SUBMITTAL AND NOTIFY THE ARCHITECT OF ANY CONFLICTS WITH THE PROPOSED INSTALLATION.

C CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE NECESSARY TO INSTALL THE LIGHT FIXTURES.

D CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR ALL MISCELLANEOUS LOW VOLTAGE AND LINE VOLTAGE LIGHTING TRACK CONNECTORS, ACCESSORIES, AND HARDWARE TO

SUPPORT AND POWER THE TRACK AS PER THE SPECIFIC INSTALLATION AND AS RECOMMENDED BY THE MANUFACTURER. SEE ARCHITECTURAL RCP’S FOR EXACT

TRACK LENGTHS, LAYOUTS AND DETAILS.

E RECESSED LIGHT FIXTURES MUST BE INSTALLED SO THAT THE BOTTOM OF THE THROAT IS EVEN WITH THE FINISHED CEILING PLANE. LEVELING OF FIXTURE

THROATS SHALL TAKE PLACE AFTER THE FINISHED CEILING PLANE HAS BEEN INSTALLED. THE REFLECTOR CONE’S OVERLAPPING FLANGE MUST THEN FIT FLUSH TO

THE CEILING PLANE / THROAT. NO LIGHT LEAK SHALL BE VISIBLE. ALL MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE AND CEILING MODIFICATIONS NECESSARY ABOVE THE CEILING

PLANE TO ACCOMPLISH THE ABOVE SHALL BE INCLUDED IN THE BASE BID.

F ALL ADJUSTABLE INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL BE TARGETED AND ADJUSTED BY THE ELC UNDER THE OBSERVATION AND IN COMPLIANCE WITH

RECOMMENDATIONS OF THE LIGHTING DESIGNER. ALL LABOR AND MATERIAL COSTS MADE NECESSARY BY THIS REQUIREMENT SHALL BE INCLUDED AS PART OF

THE BASE BID.

G ALL LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL HAVE A U.L. LABEL. ALL EXTERIOR LIGHT FIXTURES SHALL HAVE A U.L. WET LABEL.

H RECESSED DOWNLIGHT FIXTURES (INCAND., COMP. FLUOR., & HID) SHALL HAVE CLEAR, "SOFTGLOW", SELF-FLANGED REFLECTORS.

M ALL HPS LAMPS SHALL BE COLOR ENHANCED HPS WITH A COLOR TEMPERATURE OF 2200 DEGREES KELVIN AND A MINIMUM OF 60 CRI UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN

LAMP SCHEDULE. LAMP IS ONLY AVAILABLE FROM GE OR PHILIPS AND NOT AVAILABLE FROM OSRAM/SYLVANIA.

J ALL FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES (T8, BIAX, QUAD, AND TRIPLE TUBE) SHALL USE ELECTRONIC BALLASTS.

K ALL FLUORESCENT LAMPS (T8, BIAX, QUAD, AND TRIPLE TUBE) SHALL HAVE A COLOR TEMPERATURE OF XX00 DEGREES KELVIN AND A MINIMUM OF 82 CRI UNLESS

NOTED OTHERWISE IN LAMP SCHEDULE.

L ALL METAL HALIDE LAMPS SHALL HAVE A COLOR TEMPERATURE OF 3200 DEGREES KELVIN AND A MINIMUM OF 70 CRI UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN LAMP

SCHEDULE.

M ALL HPS LAMPS SHALL BE COLOR ENHANCED HPS WITH A COLOR TEMPERATURE OF 2200 DEGREES KELVIN AND A MINIMUM OF 60 CRI UNLESS NOTED OTHERWISE IN

LAMP SCHEDULE. LAMP IS ONLY AVAILABLE FROM GE OR PHILIPS AND NOT AVAILABLE FROM OSRAM/SYLVANIA.

N ALL MR16's SHALL BE "CONSTANT COLOR" BY GENERAL ELECTRIC OR EQUIVALENT.

O WHERE CONTINUOUS RUNS OF NEW FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES OCCUR, CONTRACTOR SHALL ORDER AND INSTALL A MINIMUM NUMBER OF MULTIPLE LAMP

ELECTRONIC BALLASTS IN A "MASTER / SLAVE" CONFIGURATION. SUBMITTAL DRAWINGS ARE REQUIRED FOR EACH CONTINUOUS RUN DOCUMENTING EXACT

BALLAST LOCATION/CONFIGURATION.

P WHEN INSTALLING COMPACT FLUORESCENT LIGHT FIXTURES, CONSISTENT LAMP ORIENTATION SHALL BE MAINTAINED IN A GIVEN AREA.

Q MULTIPLE MANUFACTURERS ARE NAMED FOR EACH LIGHTING FIXTURE TYPE WHERE APPROPRIATE. IF A CATALOG NUMBER HAS ONLY BEEN DETAILED NEXT TO THE

FIRST MANUFACTURER, THE MANUFACTURER’S NAMES THAT FOLLOW THE FIRST NAME ARE CONSIDERED EQUIVALENT AND SHALL PROVIDE A PRODUCT EQUAL OR

SUPERIOR TO THE FIRST MANUFACTURER’S PRODUCT IN PERFORMANCE, FABRICATION QUALITY, AND AESTHETICS. WHEN ONLY ONE MANUFACTURER'S NAME IS

LISTED ON THE LIGHTING FIXTURE SCHEDULE, THE PRODUCT'S DESIGN ENGINEERING, PHOTOMETRIC PERFORMANCE, ARCHITECTURAL AESTHETICS, AND/OR PAST

HOK POSITIVE/NEGATIVE EXPERIENCES WILL NOT ALLOW A SUBSTITUTION OF BY ANOTHER MANUFACTURER'S PRODUCT. A PRE-NEGOTIATED "DISTRIBUTOR COST'

FROM THE ONE NAME MANUFACTURER IS ON RECORD WITH THE HOK LIGHTING GROUP AND WITH THE ST. LOUIS SALES REPRESENTATIVE FOR THE PRODUCT

SPECIFIED.

R ALL RECESSED HORIZONTAL LAMP COMPACT FLUORESCENT DOWNLIGHTS MUST INCLUDE A SWING/HATCH DOOR OR CUT-OUT ON REFLECTOR CONE OPPOSITE

SOCKET TO ALLOW FOR SAFE LAMP REPLACEMENT. WITHOUT THIS HATCH OR CUTOUT, DURING LAMP REPLACEMENT, LAMPS ARE PULLED FROM SOCKET AND

SLAMMED INTO SOLID CONE, BREAKING THE LAMP AND INJURING MAINTENANCE PERSONNEL. SWING/HATCH DOOR MUST BE SAME FINISH/MATERIAL AS REFLECTOR

CONE.

S FOR ALL RECESSED WALLWASH LUMINAIRES, ORIENT/INSTALL LUMINAIRE WALLWASH REFLECTOR SUCH THAT ASYMMETRIC WALL WASH OPTICS DIRECT LIGHT

TOWARD WALL SURFACE AS INDICATED IN RCP.

T CERTAIN FIXTURE TYPES MAY REQUIRE SPECIAL EMERGENCY LIGHTING CHARACTERISTICS. PROJECT ELECTRICAL ENGINEERS TO DESIGNATE WHICH FIXTURES

REQUIRE ADVANCED EMERGENCY LIGHTING CAPABILITIES (BATTERY BACKUP, QUARTZ RESTRIKE, ETC.). SEE ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS FOR SPECIFICATION OF

EMERGENCY COMPONENTS.

HOK 13.01051.00

265100.10-8 07 JULY 2014 - ISSUED FOR BID

Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement